Tải bản đầy đủ (.doc) (191 trang)

Giao an English 7

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (872.27 KB, 191 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

1911An Truong C Secondary School


<i><b>English 7 Lesson Plan 1</b></i>


<b>SỞ GIÁO DỤC VÀ ĐÀO TẠO TRÀ VINH</b>
<b>PHÒNG GIÁO DỤC VÀ ĐÀO TẠO CÀNG LONG</b>


<i><b>TRƯỜNG THCS AN TRƯỜNG C</b></i>


<b>Giáo Án</b>


English 7



Giáo viên :

<b>Nguy</b>

<b>ễn Thị Kiều Phương</b>



Năm học : 2009-2010



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

WEEK : 1st<sub> </sub>

<b><sub>REVISION ENGLISH 6</sub></b>



PERIOD:1


DATE OF PREPARING:

<b> INTRODUCTION ENGLISH 7</b>


DATE OF TEACHING :


:


TIME TECHNIQUES


CONTENT


ACTIVITIES OF
TEACHER AND



STUDENTS
5’


10’


5’


8’


Bingo


Noughts and
crosses


Gap fill


Answer given


<b>I.REVIEW OF </b>
<b>NUMBERS:</b>
0 – 100


<b>II. THE SIMPLE </b>
<b>PRESENT TENSE :</b>


<i>1. TOBE:</i>


Ex : I am a student
I /



student She / nurse He / teacher
They/


farmers He / doctor Lan / student
We /


worker Nam / engineer It / cat
<i>2. ORDINARY VERBS :</i>
Go, wash , teach , clean


1. She …………. to
school every
morning .
2. I ………..


English.


3. He ………dishes
every day.


4. They …………..the
windows every month.
<b>III. QUESTION WORDS :</b>
What , where , who, why ,
when, how , which


0. Her name is Lan.
→ What’s her name ?
1.I live in Tra Vinh.


2. They are doctors.
3. He is thirteen years old.


T gives ss to give some
numbers


and write them on b.
T and ss do the game
T explains this game
T divides the class into 2
teams


2 teams compete
T gives feedback


T models first


Ss go to b and fill in the
blanks


with the suitable verbs
and


forms of the verbs.
T corrects


T gives the answers given
of


the sentences on b and


models.


Ss prepare and make
questions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

10’


5’


2’


Transformation


writing 4. His birthday is on May 2


nd<sub>.</sub>


<b>IV. WRITING SKILL :</b>
 <i><b>Write a short paragraph</b></i>


<i><b>to introduce you.</b></i>


Ex : Hi ! My name is Lan . I
live at 12 Tran Hung Dao
street.There are four people
in my family : my father ,
my mother, my sister and I.
My father is a doctor .My
mother is a teacher. My
sisters and I are students.


<b>V.INTRODUCTION </b>
<b>ENGLISH 7:</b>


1. Develop 4 skills :


listening,speaking , reading
and writing.


2. Prepare ss’ lessons before
coming to the class.


3. Study hard the lessons.
4. Have a pen, a pencil, a red
pen, a notebook, a texbook
and a ruler.


5. Good ss help less ss in a
group or a pair.


<b>VI.HOMEWORK:</b>


- Copy down carefully the
homework.


- Prepare Unit 1 ( A1,3)


T guides and asks ss to
read


the text and write another


paragraph


about their family.Replace
the underline


words.Ss write on b.
T gives feedback
T introduces the aim of
learning


English 7 some rules to
study better


this year.


T requests ss to prepare
carefully


the lessons before going
to class.


Ss take notes.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

PERIOD:2

<b>LESSON 1: A</b>

<b>1,3</b>

<b> ( P.10-12 )</b>



DATE OF PREPARING :
DATE OF TEACHING :


<b>AIM : Greeting people</b>



<b>OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, ss can greet to each other.</b>
<b>SKILL: Speaking, Listening and Writing</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : Cards</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE :</b>


5’


5’


7’


8’


10


<b>I . WARM UP</b>
* <i><b>Greetings :</b></i>
T Good morning
Good afternoon
Good evening
Good night
Good bye
Hi , Hello


<b>II. PRESENTATION:</b>
 <i><b>Set the scene</b></i>


Ba Nga Hoa Nam


They are introdcing each other
 Present the dialogue:


Hoa : Good morning . My name’s
Nam. Are you a new student?
Hoa : Yes, I ‘m in class 7A.
Nam: Oh, So am I .


 <i><b>Grammar point :</b></i>
Adj + to Verb ( infinitive )
<b>III. PRACTICE :</b>


 <i><b>Practice the dialogue :</b></i>
A1 ( a,b) p.10 – 11


 Answer the questions a – e
 Answer key :


a. Her name is Hoa.
b. She is in class 7A.
c. Nam is also in class 7A.
 <i><b>Practice with cards:</b></i>
a. Nice/ meet.


S1 : Nice to meet you.
S2 : Nice to meet you ,too.
b. Nice / see.


Chatting



Presentati
on


Word cue
drill


T asks ss to tell some greetings again.
T says some models


Ss greet each other


T sets the scene


T reads the dialogue 1 time


Ss close their books and listen to teacher
carefully.


Ss listen to T again and open their books.
T presents the dialogue.


T asks ss some questions on p.11 ( a,b,c)
Ss read the dialogue and answer


T requests ss to practice the dialogue in pairs.
T moves around and helps.


Ss read the text and answer the questions.
a- e



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

8’


2’


c. Happy / meet.
d. Glad/ see.


<b>IV. PRODUCTION :</b>


 <i><b>Complete the dialogue : </b></i>
<i><b>A3(p.12)</b></i>


Nga : Good morning, (1)
………


Mr Tan : (2)……….., Nga (3)
…………?


Nga : I am very well, thank you.
(4)………..


Mr Tan : I am fine, thanks.
Goodbye.


See you (5)………
Nga : (6)……….


 Answer key :
(1) Mr Tan



(2) Good morning
(3) How are you?
(4) And you
(5) Later
(6) Goodbye


<b>V. HOMEWORK:</b>


- Write the exercises in their
notebooks.


- Answer the questions A1, prepare


A2


Gap fill


T gives a poster on b.
T explains.


Ss fill in the blanks with the suitable words


T and ss correct


T asks ss to take notes what T requests
Ss listen to T carefully.


WEEK : 1st<sub> </sub>

<b>UNIT 1 : BACK TO SCHOOL</b>



PERIOD: 3 LESSON 2: A2 ( P.11 )


DATE OF PREPARING :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

<b>AIM: Reading a text to understand about Hoa’s school in a new school year.</b>
<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss can read a text.</b>


<b>SKILL : Reading, Speaking and Writing.</b>
<b>TEACHING AIDS : poster, chalk ,board.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


5’


7’


3’


7’
13’


<b>I.WARM UP:Revision</b>


<i><b>* Give the antonym of the adjectives :</b></i>
Old # new


Big # small
Happy # unhappy
<b>II.PRE-READING:</b>


<i><b>* Pre-teach vocabulary:</b></i>Pre-teach
D<i><b>i</b></i>fferent (adj ): khác nhau(Translation)
Lots of = many : nhiều(Synonym)


P<i><b>a</b></i>rents : cha mẹ(Situation)


( to) miss : nhớ(Situation)


( to) stay with : ở với(Explanation)
Check voabulary:ROR


 <i><b>True /False prediction</b></i>
+ Set the scene


Hoa


a. Hoa is a new student in class 7A.
b. She is from Hanoi.


c. She doesn’t have any friends in
Hanoi.


d. Her old school is bigger than her
new school.


e. Hoa is happy now.
<b>III. WHILE – READING:</b>
 <i><b>Checking T/F prediction:</b></i>
 <i><b>Answer the questions :</b></i>
a- e ( p.11)


+ answer key:
<i><b>T/F prediction:</b></i>
1T; 2F; 3T ; 4F; 5F


<i><b>Questions:</b></i>


<b>a.</b> Hoa is from Hue.


<b>b.</b> She is staying with her uncle and
aunt.


<b>c.</b> No, she doesn’t.


<b>d.</b> Her new school is bigger than her
old school.


Reading


Comprehension
Questions


Retell


T writes the adjs on b.
T models


Ss go to b and write the
antonym of these adjs.
T corrects.


T elicits vocabulary
Ss guess


T and ss model


Ss repeat


T checks meaning ,


pronunciation, stress, kind of
words.


T sets the scene


Ss guess T/F prediction
T gives feedback.


Ss open their books and read to
check T/F.


Ss read the text again and work
in groups to answer questions.


Ss display


T corrects


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

8’
2’


<b>e.</b> She is unhappy because she misses
her parents and her friends.


<b>IV.POST-READING:</b>



 <i><b>Tell the story of Hoa in a summary.</b></i>


<b>V. HOMEWORK :</b>


Copy down answer key into students’
notebooks.


Write the paragraph.
Prepare A3,4,5.


the story of Hoa again


T assigns
Ss take note


<b> </b>





WEEK : 2nd<sub> </sub>

<b>UNIT 1 : BACK TO SCHOOL</b>



PERIOD: 4 LESSON 3 : A4,5,6 ( P.12-13)
DATE OF PREPARING :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

<b> AIM: To help ss to listen to some information about greetings.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss can listen for details and know how to </b>
order the pictures.



<b>SKILL : Listening, Speaking and Writing.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS :Textbook, poster, chalk ,board.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


5’


2’
7’


7’
6’
12’


<b>I.WARM UP:</b>
* <i><b>Questions:</b></i>


1.How are you today?
2.How about you?
3.How is everything?
4.How are you?
* Answer :


Just fine; ok ; pretty good ; not bad
<b>II. PRE-LISTENING:</b>


 <i><b>Set the scene:</b></i>
4 pictures A5(p.13)


* Guessing:



a ? b? c? d?


<b>III.WHILE- LISENING :</b>
 Checking guessing:


 <i><b>Order the pictures with the dialogues:</b></i>
c-b-d-a


<i><b>* A</b><b>4</b><b> .Listen and complete the dialogue</b></i> :


+ Dialogue 1:


Mr Tan Miss Lien
Mr Tan : Hello,Lien .


……….?
Mirs Lien : …………..,thank you
……….., Tan?


Mr Tan :………., I am very busy.
Mrs Lien : ………..
+ Dialogue 2:


Nam Nga
Nam: Good afternoon ,Nga .
………?


Chatting



Guessing


Odering
pictures


Listening


Gap fill


T asks ss some questions
about their health.


Ss answer.


T reviews more questions
about health. Besides “How
are you?”, “ How about
you ?” How is everything ?”,
and some answers. “ Not bad
“,’’ Pretty good”


T requests ss to open their
books and asks “ How many
pictures are there ?”in the
pictures, “How many
people…?” Are they


students..?( boy students or
girl students?).Are they
teachers?



T reads 3 times.


Ss listen to T carefully.
Ss take notes what they
heard.


Ss order
T corrects


Ss read the questions and
answers in the box first.
Ss fill in the blanks first.
T reads two times.
Ss listen to T


T reads the third time


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

5’


1’


Nga : …… thanks .


………, Nam?
Nam :………, thanks.


Nga : I am going to the lunch room.
Nam : Yes. ……….
<b>IV. POST-READING:</b>



 <i><b>Questions:</b></i>
1. How are you?
2. How about you?
3. How are you today?
4. How is every thing?
<b>V. HOMEWORK:</b>


- Copy exercides A4,5


- Prepare B1,2,3


Questions
and
answers


the blanks with questions
and answers.


T reads again.
T and Ss correct.
Ss copy.


Ss ask their classmates.
T moves around and helps ss
to display.


T corrects.


T asks ss to take notes what


T said.




WEEK : 2nd<sub> </sub>

<b>UNIT 1 : BACK TO SCHOOL</b>



PERIOD: 5 LESSON 4 : B1,2,3 ( P.15-16)
DATE OF PREPARING :


DATE OF TEACHING :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice speaking about </b>
“ family name “, “middle name”,” where they live”,” how old they are “.


<b>SKILL : Speaking and Writing, Reading and Listening.</b>
<b>TEACHING AIDS :Textbook, poster, chalk ,board.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>
5’
6’
7’
8’
<b>I.WARM UP:</b>
<i><b>* Questions:</b></i>


1. How old are you? # 2. How are you?
_I am 12 years old _ Fine .Thanks
<b>II. PRE-SPEAKING:</b>


 <i><b>Pre –teach vocabulary :</b></i>
Family name : họ



Middle name : chữ lót
An address : địa chỉ
- check vocabulary:


 <i><b>Presentation dialogue : B1 (15)</b></i>
+ Set the scene :


Miss Lien Hoa
a. What’s Hoa’s family name ?
b. What her middle name ?
c. Where does she live ?
<b>III.WHILE-SPEAKING :</b>


 <i>Answer key :</i>


a.Hoa’s family name is Pham.
b.Her middle name is Thi.


c.She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street.
<i><b>* Practice the dialogue in pairs:</b></i>
<i><b>* Question review:</b></i>


1. What’s your family name?
2.How old are you?


3.Where do you live?
*<i><b>Mapped dialogue:</b></i>
+Set the scene:



You


What’s your ……..name?


Your
classmate
Chatting
Pre-teach
Situation
Example
Explanation
ROR
Presentation
dialogue

Pre-questions
Speaking
Language
Review
Mapped
dialogue


T asks ss to talk about
their age.Differences
between “How old?”
and “How are you?”
T elicits Ss guess
T and ss model
Ss repeat



T checks Ss copy
T checks by ROR.
T sets the scene
T reads the dialogue
first.Ss close their
books and listen to T.
T asks questions.
Ss understand the
questions.


Ss open their
books,look at the
books.


T reads again


T asks the questions.
Ss answer shortly to
understand the
dialogue .


T gives feedback.
T has ss practice the
dialogue in pairs.
After practising, ss list
some questions in the
dialogue for


understanding.
Ss copy



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

4’


1’


What’s…..middle……name?
How ………you?


Where ………live?
Thanks………..


-It’s ………
-My middle
name ……
-I’m


……….
I live


….11….


<b>IV. POST-SPEAKING: B</b>2(P.16)


 <i><b>Fill in the blanks with ‘WH- questions</b></i>”:
+Answer key:


Who,who,which,where,where,how
<b>V. HOMEWORK:</b>


-Copy exercises : B1,2



- Do exercises B3


-Prepare B4,5,6


Gap fill


T asks ss to practice
again in pairs.


Some pairs display


T corrects


T requests ss to do
exercises B


-2( p.16).


Ss fill in the blanks
with WH – questions:
who, which , where.


T and ss correct
T assigns


Ss take notes.


Week : 2nd<sub> </sub>

<b>UNIT 1 : BACK TO SCHOOL</b>




PERIOD: 6 LESSON 5 : B4,5,6 ( P.16-17)
DATE OF PREPARING :


DATE OF TEACHING :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know asking and </b>
answering about the distance.


<b>SKILL : Speaking and Listening.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS :Textbook, poster, chalk ,board.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


5’


5’


10’


10’


<b> I.WARM UP :</b>


<i><b>* Students make their own </b></i>
<i><b>dialogue:</b></i>


A: What’s your family name?
B: It’s ………. My middle
name……



A: How old are you ?
B: I’m ……….
A : Where do you live ?
B: ……….village.
A : Thank you, ……….
<b>II. PRE-SPEAK :</b>


 <i><b>Pre- teach vocabulary</b></i> :
Far ( adj.) : xa # near
Distance : khoảng cách.
_ checking vocabulry
 <i><b>Dialogue build:</b></i>
+ Set the scene :


Nam Hoa
Nam: Where do you live , Hoa?
Hoa : I live at 12 Tran Hung Dao


street.


Nam : How far is it from your house
to school ?


Hoa : It’s not far_ about one
kilometer.


Nam : How do you go to school?
Hoa : I go to school by bike .


<b>Form</b><i><b>: How far is it + from + place</b></i>


<i><b>to place ?</b></i>


<i><b> - It’s about + số m/ km.</b></i>
Use : Ask about the distance.
Meaning : How far ….? : bao xa
<b>III. WHILE- SPEAK:</b>


 <i><b>Students practice the dialogue </b></i>


Revision


Pre-teach
Antonym
Translation
ROR


Dialogue build


Speaking


T calls three pairs of ss to stand
up and make their own dialogue
with the old lesson on B1(p.15)


T and ss remark
T gives marks .


T elicits Ss guess
T and ss model



Ss repeat T checks
Ss copy


T checks again.
T sets the scene.
Ss close their books .
T reads Ss listen to T
and repeat .


Ss practice the dialogue


T reads the dialogue the second
time .


Ss opens their books.


T asks ss some questions for
understanding .


Ss practice the dialogue in
pairs.


From the dialogue , T and ss
say structure “How far is
it….?”


With the structure , ss practice
speaking on p.17 (B5) .


T guides to pronouce the words


: meter and kilometer.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

8’


6’


1’


<i><b>in pairs.</b></i>


 <i><b>Students answer the questions </b></i>
<i><b>for understanding.</b></i>


1.Where does Hoa live ?


2.How far is it from her house to
school?


3.How does she go to school?
<i><b>* Practice B</b><b>5</b><b>(p.17)</b></i>


Picture a : market / 2 kilometers.
Picture b : post office / 6 kilometers
Picture c : bus stop / 400 meters.
<b>III.POST-SPEAK:</b>


 <i><b>B</b><b>6:</b><b>: Listen and write (p.18)</b></i>


Ss listen and write the fourth
distances:



a/ School to Lan’s house .
b/ Lan’s house to post office .
c/ School to movie theater .
d/ Movie theater to post office.
<b>V. HOMEWORK:</b>


- Copy B5 (p.17)


- Learn by heart the lesson.
- Prepare U.2 A1,2,3


Picture drill


Listening


Ss work in pairs
Ss display


T corrects.


T asks ss to look at the picture
on p.18.


T guides four distances for
listening.


T reads Ss listen


T reads the second and the


third.


Ss write on board.


T reads again and corrects.
T consolidates “ How far …?”
Ss take notes.





Week : 3rd<sub> </sub>

<b>UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>



PERIOD: 7 LESSON 1 : A1,2,3( P.19-20)
DATE OF PREPARING :


DATE OF TEACHING :


<b>AIM: To help ss to know how to ask and answer the telephone number.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer the </b>
telephone numbers and practice asking the address.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

<b>TEACHING AIDS :Textbook, poster, chalk ,board, cards.</b>
PROCEDUCE:
5’
4’
3’
20’
7’


<b>I.WARM UP:</b>
<i><b>* Distances:</b></i>


1/ school/ (5) kilometers
2/ post office / (7) kilometers
Ex : How far is it from your house to
school ?


- It’s about 5 kilometers.
<b>II. PRESENTATON :</b>
 <i><b>Pre-teach vocabulary :</b></i>
(to) call somebody : gọi ai đó
- check vocabulatry


 <i><b>Presentation text : A</b><b>3 </b><b>(p.20)</b></i>


+ set the scene :


Lan Hoa
+ Model sentences:


Lan : What’s your telephone number ?
Hoa : 8262019


Your/ her/ his


- ask your telephone numbers.
<b>III. PRACTICE:</b>


 <i><b>Cards of numbers : A</b><b>1</b><b>( p.19-20)</b></i>



1. An / 7345610.


S1: What’s his telephone number ?


S2: 7345610


2. Anh/ 8269516
3. Ba / 5267117
4. Bang / 9259288
5. Bat/ 6275564
6. Bich/ 8231236


 <i><b>Listen and write the telephone </b></i>
<i><b>numbers</b></i>.


 Answer key:
a. 8251654
Revision
Pre-teach
Situaion
ROR
Presentation
Text
Word cue
drill
Listening


T calls 2 pairs on
board and practice


asking and


answering about the
distance from their
house to school and
to the post office.
T gives marks and
remarks .


T elicits Ss guess
T and ss model
Ss repeat SS copy
T checks


T sets the scene.
T reads the
dialogue.
Ss listen to T


Ss open their books
to p.20.


T and ss say model
sentances.


T says the using .
Ss copy down.
T gives word cue
drill.



T and ss model first.
Ss work in pairs.
Ask and answer
about these personal
telephone numbers.
T moves around and
helps.


Ss display
T corrects


T reads , ss listen
and write the
telephone numbers
T reads 2 times
more


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

5’


1’


b. 8250514
c. 8521936
d. 8351793
e. 8237041
f. 8821651


<b>IV. PRODUCTION:</b>


<i><b> * Ask your classmates and complete </b></i>


<i><b>the list:( p.20)</b></i>


Name Address Telephone


number


Lan 12 Le Loi 575623


<b>V. HOMEWORK:</b>


- Learn by heart the questions “ what’s
your telephone number ?”


- Copy down the telephone numbers.
- Prepare A4,5


Survey


write out the
telephone they
heard.


T reads again and
corrects.


Ss go around and
ask their classmates
these questions .( 1.
What’s your



name ?; 2.Where do
you live?; 3.What’s
your telephone
number?)


And fill in the table.
Some ss go in front
of the class and tell
again.


T remarks.


T consolidates and
assigns.


Ss learns the lesson,
prepare the new
lesson.


Week : 3rd<sub> </sub>

<b>UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>



PERIOD: 8 LESSON 2 : A4,5( P.19-20)
DATE OF PREPARING :


DATE OF TEACHING :


<b>AIM: To help ss to know how to ask and answer the telephone number.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer the </b>
telephone numbers and practice asking the address.



<b>SKILL : Speaking, Reading and Listening.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

PROCEDUCE:
5’
5’
5’
10’
10’
<b>I.WARM UP:</b>
* <i><b>Questions :</b></i>


1.What’s your name ?
2. Where do you live ?


3. What’s your telephone number?
<b>II. PRESENTATION:</b>


 <b>Vocabulary:</b>
(to) meet : gặp
free (adj) rảnh rỗi


tomorrow ( adv) ngày mai
- Check vocabulary
 Presentation text:
+ Set the scene:


Phong Tam
<b>+ Model sentences:</b>



1. What time will it start ?
2. Where will we meet ?
Form :


WH-Questions + will + S + Vinf
<b>……?</b>


<b>Meaning : </b><i><b>will :</b></i> sẽ


Use : The simple future tense is
used for action in the future.
<b>III. PRACTICE :</b>


 <i><b>Answer the questions: a.→ d. </b></i>
<i><b>(p21)</b></i>


+ Answer key :


a. Phong and Tam will meet
tomorrow.


b. They will see a movie.
c. They will meet at 6.45 .
d. They will meet in front of the


movie theater.
 <i><b>Word cue drill :</b></i>
1. Where / meet ?


in the street



2. What time / meet ?
at 7.00


3. What / see ?
a film
4. How / go
by bike
Chatting
Pre-teach
Situation
Translation
Explanation
ROR
Presentation text
Model sentences
Comprenhension
Questions


Word cue drill


T asks ss some
questions.


Ss answer if it’s
right .


T remarks and gives
marks to ss.



T elicits Ss guess
T and ss model
Ss repeat T checks
pronunciation,
meaning , kind of
words , stress.
Ss copy . T checks
again.


T asks ss to close
their books. T sets the
scene.


T reads first Ss listen
Ss open their books.
From the text, ss find
the questions have “
will”


T writes on b.


T and ss analize the
questions and give
“form, meaning, use”
Ss copy down


Ss read the text again
And answer the
questions in pairs.
( short answers).Ss


stand up and display.
Another ss remark
T corrects.


T gives word cues on
b.


T and good ss model
Ss work in pairs to
ask and answer .
T goes around and
help less ss .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

9’


1’


<i>Example exchange</i> :


1. S1 : Where will we meet ?


S2 : We’ll meet in the street.


<b>IV.PRODUCTION :</b>
 A5 ( P.21 )


<i><b>Listen and write the answers :</b></i>
<i><b>a.</b></i> Telephone number : <i><b>8545545</b></i>
<i><b>b.</b></i> They will see : <i><b>a movie </b></i>
<i><b>c.</b></i> They will meet at : <i><b>Lan’s </b></i>



<i><b>house</b></i>


<i><b>d.</b></i> They will go by <i><b>: bus</b></i>
<b>V. HOMEWORK :</b>


- Learn the lesson carefully.
- Copy exercises A4,5.


- Prepare A6,7.


Listening


Others remark
T corrects


T sets the scene.
T reads two times.
Ss listen to the tape
and take notes.
T reads the third
Ss go to the board and
fill.


T reads finally. T and
ss correct.


T consolidates “will”
in “ WH- questions”
Ss take notes.



Week : 3rd<sub> </sub>

<b>UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>



PERIOD: 9 LESSON 3 : A6,7( P.22-23)
DATE OF PREPARING :


DATE OF TEACHING :


<b>AIM: To help ss to practice in the “will” future, WH- questions and answers.</b>
<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use “will” future , and </b>
WH- questions with “ will”.


<b>SKILL : Speaking, Reading and Listening.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS :Textbook, poster, chalk ,board.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

<b>6’</b>


<b>2’</b>


15’


10’


10’


* <i><b>Pre-teach vocabulary:</b></i>
- Who’s calling ?: Ai gọi đó?



- Can I speak to ….? Tơi có thể nói chuyện
với?


- I’ll call again : Tơi có thể gọi lại.
→Check vocabulary:


 Presentation dialogue : A6( p.22)


+ Set the scene :


Han ? Phong
<b>II. PRACTICE :</b>


<b>*</b><i><b>Comprehension questions </b></i><b>: A6(p.22) a-e</b>
+ Answer key :


a. Phong is calling.


b. Han is answering the phone.
c. They are talking about Lan.
d. She will be back at about six


o’clock.


e. He’ll call her again after 6.


 <i><b>Answer given :</b></i>
+ Set the scene:


Will you come my party ?


a. at five thirty


b. We’ll eat cakes and sweets.
c. Till seven or half past.
d. We’ll meet in the street.
→Answer key:


a. When will the party be ?
b. What will we eat ?


c. How long will the party last ?
d. When will we meet ?


<b>III. PRODUCTION :</b>
 <i><b>Dialogue :</b></i>


<b>+ Set the scene :</b>


Tan Nam


What…………do
tomorrow morning
<b>Pre-teach</b>
Situation
Translation
Situation
Matching
Presentation
dialogue
Comprehension


Questions
Answer given
Mapped
dialogue
guess


T and ss model
Ss repeat T
checks


pronunciation,
meaning, kind
of words, stress.
Ss copy T
checks


T sets the scene
Han and Phong
are on the
telephone.
Ss close their
books and listen
to T.


Ss open their
books and read
the dialogue
carefully,
answer the
questions.


Ss work in
groups.


T divides into
six groups.
T moves around
and helps.
Ss display their
answers T
corrects.


T sets the scene
in A7(p.22)


Ss work in pairs
to make


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

2’
?


What……..watch ?
Yes. When……
start?


Where
…….meet ?
Ok.


Go………stadium.
A football match


Would…like…me?
4:30……..meet at
4:15.


In front of…..
stadium.


<b>IV. HOMEWORK:</b>
-Learn the lesson.
-Copy A6,7


- Prepare B1,2,4.


T makes
dialogue
T reads and
writes the
dialogue on b
with a mapped
dialogue.
Ss repeat after
T( 2 times)
2 pairs of good
ss can practice
again.


Another ss in
pairwork again.
T calls some
pairs display the


mapped


dialogue.
T remarks


T consolidates:
“will” to use for
future tense.


Week : 4th<sub> </sub>

<b><sub>UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION</sub></b>



PERIOD: 10 LESSON 4 : B1,2,4( P.24-25)
DATE OF PREPARING :


DATE OF TEACHING :


<b>AIM: To help ss to practice dates of the year, pronunciation.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice dates of the </b>
year.


<b>SKILL : Speaking, Writing and Listening.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS :Textbook, poster, chalk ,board.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


5’ I.WARM UP:


Tenth Thứ hai


First Thứ mười


Revision
Matching


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

8’
2’
2’
4’
6’
9’


Second Thứ ba
Third Thứ nhất
Fourth Thứ chính
Eighth Thứ năm
Sixth Thứ tư
Fifth Thứ tám
Seventh Thứ sáu
Ninth Thứ bảy
II. PRE-SPEAK:


*<i><b>Pre-teach vocabulary:</b></i>
Twelfh : 12th


Twentieth : 20th


Twenty-first : 21st


Thirtieth : 30th



Thirty-first : 31st


Date of birth : ngày sinh
( to ) worry : lo lắng
Nervous (adj) : hồi hộp
→Check vocabulary:


 Presentation dialogue :
+ Set the scene :


Mr Tan ? Hoa
1. How old is Hoa now ?


2. Who does Hoa live with ?
III. WHILE-SPEAK:


 <i><b>Ss read the dialogue and check the </b></i>
<i><b>questions:</b></i>


 <i><b>Questions </b></i><b>: a/- e/</b>
+ Answer key :
a/ 13 years old


b/ 14 ( on her next birthday )
c/ on June eighth.


d/ her uncle and aunt.


e/ because she doesn’t have any friends.


 <i><b>Ss practice the dialogue:</b></i>


 Making the dialogue :


You Your classmates


What’s your ……...?
What’s……date…?
What’s…address?


Pham Van An
………..sixth
Pre-teach
Explanation
Explanation
Explanation
Explanation
Explanation
Situation
Situation
Translation
ROR
Reading
Mapped
dialogue


T asks ss to match
English words with
Vietnamese words.
T requests ss to go to


b and do them.
Another ss correct
T gives correction
T elicits Ss guess
T and ss model
Ss repeat
T checks
pronunciation,
meaning, kind of
words and stress.
Ss copy down
T checks again for
remembering.
T sets the scene: “
Mr Tan and Hoa are
talking about……?”
T reads the dialogue
first.


Ss close their books
and listen to T
carefully for
answering the
questions.


Ss open their books
to check questions.
Ss read the dialogue
again



and answer the
questions left. These
answers can be short
answers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

8’


1’


Do you…..school?
Ok. ………


…………Le Loi
Yes,…….


<b>III. POST-SPEAK:</b>


 <i><b>Listening and writing the dates of </b></i>
<i><b>months.</b></i>


+ Answer key :
The first of July
The nineteenth
The sixth
The fourteenth
The seventeenth
The thirty-first
<b>IV. HOMEWORK:</b>


- Copy down the answers (p.25) a/-e/


- Answer the questions about the


students : f/-h/
- Prepare B3,5,6,7,8.


Listening


Assignment


T sets the scene and
reads and writes on
the b the mapped
dialogue.


Ss repeat after T
Good ss practice the
dialogue first.


Ss work in pairs and
practice.


Some pairs display.
T corrects.


T guides and elicits
T reads 2 times
Ss take notes what
they’ve heard. Ss go
to the board and
write.



T reads the third
time.


Other ss correct
T reads again and
corrects.


T consolidates dates
of the year.


Ss take notes.
Week : 4th<sub> </sub>

<b>UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>



PERIOD: 11 LESSON 5 : B3,5,6,7,8( P.24-26,27)
DATE OF PREPARING :


DATE OF TEACHING :


<b>AIM: To help ss to practice dates of the year, pronunciation.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice dates of the </b>
year.


<b>SKILL : Speaking, Writing and Listening.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS :Textbook, poster, chalk ,board.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


6’ <b>I.WARM UP :</b>



<b>* Months of the year :</b>


January, February, March, April,
May, June, July, August, September,
October, November, December.


Revision


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

5’


3’


5’
10’


5’


5’


5’


<b>II.PRE-READING:</b>
 Pre-teach vocabulary :
(to) inv<i><b>i</b></i>te : mời


An invitation card : lời mời


(to) have a party : có một bửa tiệc.
→Check vocabulary:



+ Set the scene :


Lan writes an invitation card.
*Students guess and fill in the gap
first.


<b>IV.WHILE-READING:</b>
 <i><b>Check guessing:</b></i>


 <i><b>Complete the invitation card to </b></i>
<i><b>Lan’s party.</b></i>


Dear <i>Hoa</i>


I am having a birthday party on
<i>Sunday May 25th<sub> . </sub></i>


The party will be at my house at
<i>24 LyThuong Kiet</i> from <i>5.00 </i>to
<i>9.00.</i>


I hope you will come and join the
fun.


Love


<i>Lan </i>


Telephone:


8674758


 <i><b>Comprehension questions :</b></i>
1. How old is Lan ?


2. When is her birthday ?
3. Where does she live ?


4. What time does the party start
and finish ?


<b>IV. POST-READING:</b>
 <i><b>B</b><b>7,8 </b><b>(P.27)</b></i>


Think and write . Imagine you will be
a


guest at Lan’s birthday party .
 <i><b>Answer key : B</b><b>7</b></i>


Pre-teach
Situation
Situation
Realia
ROR


Gap fill


Comprehension
Questions



Writing
Speaking


and T remarks last
one.


T elicits Ss guess
T and ss model
Ss repeat T checks
pronunciation,
meaning, kind of
words, stress.


Ss copy T checks by
ROR.


T sets the scene.
Ss guess to fill in the
card ( ss close their
books)


Ss open their books,
read the text


carefully.


T and ss read the text
and correct the
guessing.



Ss copy down
T gives questions
Ss answer


T gives feedback.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

1’


a/ I will give Lan a book, a pen.
b/ I will get to her home by bike, bus.
c/ I will sing a song( dance, play
chess…)


d/ I will eat a birthday cake.


e/ I will drink coca ( orange juice )
f/ I will leave at nine o’clock.
<i>+ Now write an invitation card to </i>
<i>your birthday party. (B8 p.27)</i>
<b>V. HOMEWORK:</b>


- Ss do B5 at home.


- Learn the lesson carefully.
- Prepare U.3 A1


give their answers
before the class.
T remarks before the


class.


T remarks
Gives marks.


Ss write T correct
T assigns


Ss take notes.


Week : 4 th<sub> </sub>

<b>UNIT 3 : AT HOME</b>



PERIOD: 12 LESSON 1 : A1,2( P.29-30)
DATE OF PREPARING :


DATE OF TEACHING :


<b>AIM: To help ss to know bathroom and kitchen vocabulary, exclamation.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice speaking about </b>
exclamation sentences.


<b>SKILL : Speaking, Writing and Listening and Reading.</b>
<b>TEACHING AIDS :Textbook, poster, chalk ,board.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


<b>10’</b> <b>I.PRE-SPEAK :</b>


* <i><b>Vocabulary:</b></i>



a b<i><b>a</b></i>throom : phòng tắm
a k<i><b>i</b></i>tchen : nhà bếp
a sink : bồn rửa


a w<i><b>a</b></i>shing machine : máy giặt
a d<i><b>i</b></i>shwasher : máy rửa bát


Pre-teach
Situation
Situation
Situation
Explanation
Explanation


T elicits ss guess
T and Ss model
Ss repeat


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

2’
2’
8’
3’
10’
9’


a dr<i><b>y</b></i>er : máy sấy
a tub : bồn tắm
a refr<i><b>i</b></i>gerator : tủ lạnh
- Check vocabulary:
<b>* Presentation dialogue :</b>


+ <i>Set the scene : </i>


Hoa Lan
+ <i>Questions:</i>


Which rooms do Hoa and Lan talk
about?


<b>II. WHILE-SPEAK:</b>
 <i><b>T reads and checks the </b></i>


<i><b>questions for listening.</b></i>
 <i><b>Questions</b></i> : a-d (p.30)
+ Answer key :


a/ The living room, Hoa’s bedroom,
the bathroom and the kitchen.


b/B/c it is bright and has nice colors:
pink and white.


c/ A sink, a tub and a shower.
d/ A washing machine, adryer, a
refrigerator, a dishwasher and an
electric stove.


 Model sentences :
What an awful day!


What a lovely living room!


Form : <i><b>What + a/an + adj N!</b></i>
Exclamation.


 <i><b>Word cue drill :</b></i>
a/ What/ good dress.
b/ What/ wet day.
c/ What/ expensive car.
d/ What/ boring party.
e/ What/ bad movie.
Ex :


a/ S1: What a good dress !


S2: Oh. I think so.


<b>III. POST-SPEAK:</b>


 <b>Write exclamation A2:</b>
a/ <i>Complaints :</i>


+ Answer key :


Translation
Picture
Drawing
Matching
Presentation
dialogue
Pre-questions
Reading


Comprehension
Questions
Model
sentences


Word cue drill


Writing


Ss copy down
T checks again by
matching.


T gives feedback.
Ss close their books.
T sets the scene.
T reads the dialogue.
Ss listen to T


carefully and answer
the questions.


Ss open their books.
T reads the second.
Ss read the dialogue
again and anwer the
questions.


T and Ss correct.



T requests ss to give
model sentences.
T and ss analize the
structure “


Exclamation” Ss
copy.


T gives words cue by
cards. T models first
T asks ss to give “
oh. I think so” for
responding.


Ss work in pairs.
T moves around and
helps less ss.


Ss display and T
corrects.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

1’


1/ What an awful restaurant !
2/ What a wet day !


3/ What a boring party !
4/ What a bad movie !
b/ <i>Compliments :</i>
1/ What a great party !


2/ What a bright room !
3/ What an interesting movie!
4/ What a lovely house!
5/ What a delicious dinner !
6/ What a beautiful day !
<b>IV. HOMEWORK :</b>


- Answer questions e/- f/(p.30)
- Copy down A2 carefully.


- Learn the stucture exclamation.
- Prepare A3,4.


sentences to stick
them on b.


Ss remark
T corrects.


Ss copy.


T consolidates.
Assigns.


Ss take notes.




Week : 5th<sub> </sub>

<b>UNIT 3 : AT HOME</b>




PERIOD: 13 LESSON 2 : A3,4( P.31-32)
DATE OF PREPARING :


DATE OF TEACHING :


<b>AIM: To help ss to practice speaking with stuctures “Is there/ Are there……?”</b>
<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice speaking with “</b>
Is there / Are there….?” and preposition of place.


<b>SKILL : Speaking, Writing and Listening .</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS :Textbook, poster, chalk ,board.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


<b>6’</b> <b>I.WARM UP:</b>


<b>* Prepositions:</b>


On ở trong
In gần


Near phía trước
Next to ở trên
Under phía sau
Above ở giửa
Behind bên dưới


Matching T writes the
prepositions on a
poster.



T models first.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

<b>5’</b>


<b>3’</b>


<b>20’</b>


<b>10’</b>


<b>1’</b>


In front of gần cạnh
Between bên trên
<b>II. PRE-SPEAK :</b>


 <i><b>Pre-teach vocabulary:</b></i>
a cl<i><b>o</b></i>set : tủ chén


a stove : cái lò, cái bếp
a n<i><b>e</b></i>wspaper : tờ báo
→Check vocabulary:
 Set the scene:
Picture A3 (p.31)


1/ Is there a television ?
- Yes, there is.


Is there a telephone ?


- No, there isn’t.


2/ Are there any books on the wall ?
- Yes, there are


- No, there aren’t.


→Hỏi và trả lời vật nào đó có ở đâu ?
<b>III. WHILE-SPEAK:</b>


 Picture drill :


( possible questions and answers)


<b>III. POST-SPEAK :</b>
 <i><b>Dictation list :</b></i>


1/ There is a board on the wall.
Is there a board on the wall ?


2/ Are there any flowers on the table ?
3/ There is a television on the table.
4/ Are there any books on the shelf ?
<b>IV. HOMEWORK :</b>


- Read A4 at home.


- Learn the lesson carefully.
- Prepare B1



Pre-teach
Drawing
Realia
Realia
ROR


Picture drill


Dictation list


T corrects


T elicits ss guess
T and ss model
Ss repeat
T checks


Ss copy T checks
again.


T sets the scene.
Ss look at the picture
and say sentences with
the structures : “ Is
there …?/ Are there
any …?” in E.6.


Ss copy down.
Ss open their books.
Look at the picture.


T asks some pairs of
good ss to say the
answers first.
Ss work in pairs.
T moves around for
help.


Some pairs of ss
display their sentences
before the class .
T gives corrections.
T reads


Ss write.


Ss read these sentences
they write before the
class.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

T consolidates the
structures “ Is there /
Are there ….?”


Ss listen to T and take
notes carefully.


Week : 5th<sub> </sub>

<b>UNIT 3 : AT HOME</b>



PERIOD: 14 LESSON 3 : B1( P.33-34)
DATE OF PREPARING :



DATE OF TEACHING :


<b>AIM: To help ss to practice speaking with stuctures “What,Where” questions.</b>
<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice speak with </b>
“Wh” questions.


<b>SKILL : Speaking, Writing .</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS :Textbook, poster, chalk ,board.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


5’


5’


<b>I.WARM UP :</b>


<b>* Questions:( chatting )</b>


1. How many people are there in your family?
2. How old is your father/


mother/sister/brother?


3.What does your father/ moher/sister/brother
do?


<b>II.PRE-SPEAK :</b>



<b>* Pre-teach vocabulary:</b>
(to) raise : nuôi(situation)
C<i><b>a</b></i>ttle : gia súc.( example)


T asks ss some
questions about
their family.
T gives
feedback.
T elicits
T models
T checks
pronunciation,


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

3’


4’
7’


6’



9’


A ph<i><b>o</b></i>to : tấm ảnh. ( realia )
→ Check vocabulary ( ROR)


<b>* Presentation dialogue :</b>
+ Set the scene :



Lan ? Hoa
 <b>Pre-questions:</b>


a/ What does Hoa’s father do ?
b/ Where does he work?


<b>III. WHILE-SPEAK :</b>


<b> * Check the pre-questions ( Reading)</b>
a/ He is a farmer.


b/ He works on the farm.


* Questions( Comprehension questions)
c/ What is her mother’s job ?


d/ What does she do every day ?
e/ Are they happy ?


f/ How old is Hoa’s sister ?
* Questions review :
<i><b>1/ What does he/she do ?</b></i>
<i><b>2/ Where does he/she work ?</b></i>
* Practice the dialogue :
<b>* Mapped dialogue :</b>


You Your classmate


What … your
father…?



Where….he work?
What ……...your
mother…?


Where……she
work?


Do they ……their


- He ……a………..


- ………works……….


- She…….a……….


-…………works……….


meaning, kinds
of words,
stress.T checks
again by ROR.
T sets the
scene.
T reads the
dialogue first.


T reads the
second time.



T corrects.
From the
dialogue, T
reviews some
questions to ask
about jobs,
Where they
work…..
T presents the
mapped
dialogue.
T reads


T moves around
and help less ss.


Ss listen to T
while closing
their books.


Ss open their
books and look
at it.


Ss read the
dialogue again
and answer the
questions.( short
answers).



Ss practice the
dialogue.
( opened pair,
closed pairs )
Ss display


Ss repeat
Some good ss
practice first.
Ss work in pairs.
Ss display


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

5’



1’


job?


Ok. Thank………. Yes,……….


<b>IV. POST-SPEAK :</b>


<b>* Write the mapped dialogue up :</b>


<b>V. HOMEWORK :</b>


- Learn by heart the mapped dialogue.
- Copy the answer questions a/ - f/.
- Prepare B2,3.



T corrects
T asks ss to
write the
mapped


dialogue again.
T corrects
T consolidates.
T assigns.


Ss write the
mapped
dialogue
completely.


Ss takes notes.


Week : 5th<sub> </sub>

<b>UNIT 3 : AT HOME</b>



PERIOD: 15 LESSON 4 : B2,3( P.34-35)
DATE OF PREPARING :


DATE OF TEACHING :


<b>AIM: To help ss to develop skill : reading for information about Lan’s family.</b>
<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to develop skill : reading </b>
for information about Lan’s family.


<b>SKILL : Reading, speaking.</b>



<b>TEACHING AIDS :Textbook, poster, board.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


<b>6’</b>


<b>6’</b>


<b>I.WARM UP:</b>


<b> * B3: Match these half –sentences :</b>
(matching)


A farmer writes for a
newspaper


A doctor works on a farm.
A journalist teaches in a school.
A teacher takes care of sick
people


<b>II. PRE-READING:</b>
<b>*Pre-teach vocabulary:</b>


(to) take care of : chăm sóc.(situation)
A j<i><b>ou</b></i>rnalist : nhà báo.(explanation)


T gives the jobs
and where
he/she works on


b.


T corrects.
From B3, T


guides to give
vocabuary.


Ss match to the right
jobs with the


sentences.


Ss work individually.
Ss correct


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

<b>3’</b>


<b>5’</b>


<b>15’</b>


<b>9’</b>


<b>1’</b>


A n<i><b>ew</b></i>spaper : tờ báo.(realia)
→Check vocabulary: (ROR)
+ Set the scene:



<b>* True or false prediction:</b>
1.Lan’s father is a doctor.
2.He works on a farm.
3. Lan’s mother is a nurse.
4. She works in a hospital.
5. Lan’s brother is a journalist.
<b>III. WHILE-READING:</b>


* Checking True/ false prediction:
1.T ; 2.F ; 3.F ; 4.F ; 5.T


* Discussion: Lan’s family
+ Questions :


1. What does her father do ?
2. What does her mother do ?
3.What does her brother do ?
4. Where does her father work ?
5. Where does her mother work ?
6.Where does her brother work?
<b>IV. POST-READING:</b>


<b>* Discussion: Your family</b>
+Questions:


1. What does your father do ?
2. What does your mother do ?
3. What does your brother/sister do?
4. Where do they work ?



<b>V. HOMEWORK :</b>
<b>- Copy down the answers</b>
- Learn by heart vocabulary.
- Prepare B4 (p.35)


T checks by
ROR


T sets the scene
Asks ss to
predict True or
false


T gives feedback
T requests ss to
read the text and
correct T/F
T corrects
T guides


T corrects
T guides ss to
relate to realife
for talking about
their family.
T gives
correction.
T consolidates
Asks ss to do
homework



Ss work individually
Ss say their ideas.


Ss open their books
and read about Lan’s
family.


Ss correct T/F


Ss read the text again
and discuss about
Lan’s family by
answering the
questions “ What
does he / she do?”/ “
Where does he/ she
work?”


Ss work in groups
Ss work in pairs to
ask and answer.
Ss display their
ideas.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

Week : 6th<sub> </sub>

<b>UNIT 3 : AT HOME</b>



Period: 16 LESSON 5 : B4 ( P. 35)
Date of preparation :



Date of teaching :


<b>AIM: To help ss to listen for personal information.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen for personal </b>
information.


<b>SKILL : listening , writing</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS :Textbook, poster, board.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


6’


5’


5’


<b>I.WARM UP :</b>


<b> *Matching English words with Vietnamese </b>
<b>words :</b>


<b> A farmer giáo viên</b>
A doctor học sinh
A journalist bác sĩ
A teacher kỹ sư
A student nông dân
An engineer nhà báo
<b>II. PRE-LISTENING :</b>



 <b>Pre-teach vocabulary :</b>


A high school : Trường THCS( Example)
A magazine : tạp chí ( realia )


→ Check vocabulary :( ROR)
 <b>Open prediction :</b>


T prepare the
words on a poster.
T sticks it on
board


T corrects
T elicits
T models
T checks
pronunciation,


Ss match


Ss guess
Ss model, too
Ss repeat
chorally


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

15’


7’



6’


1’


<b>+ Set the scene :</b>


<b> Tom Susan Bill</b>


<b>Name</b> <b>Age</b> <b> Job</b> <b>Place of</b>


<b>work</b>
<b>Tom</b>


<b>Susan</b>
<b>Bill</b>


<b>III. WHILE-LISTENING:</b>


 Listen for checking open prediction :


Name Age Job Place of


work


Tom 26 Teacher High school


Susan 19 Journalist magazine


Bill 20 nurse hospital



 <b>Listen for gap fill:</b>


Tom is a ……….. . He is …… years old
and ………. in a high school.


Susan is ……….. . She ……….. and …………
for a magazine.


Bill is …… and …………..a nurse. ……. work
in a ………. .


<b>IV. POST-LISTENING :</b>
 <b>Write it up :</b>


<b> V. HOMEWORK :</b>


- Learn by heart vocabulary.
- Copy down B4


- Prepare B5 ( p.36 )


stress, meaning,
kind of words.
T checks again by
ROR.


T sets the scene
T gives feedback



T reads two times
T reads again
T gives corrections
T prepares the
paragraph with
blanks.


T reads again
T reads again and
corrects.


T guides


T corrects.
T consolidates
and ask ss to do
homework and
learn by heart the
lesson.


Ss copy down
Ss write them on
the their


notebook the
table with open
prediction.
Ss guess


individually. Ss


fill in the table.
Ss listen and
correct their
guessing.
Ss check their
prediction .
Ss listen and fill
in the gaps.
Ss go to board
and fill.


Ss work in
groups and write
again what they
heard


SS display on
board.


Ss take notes


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

Week : 6th<sub> </sub>

<b>UNIT 3 : AT HOME</b>



Period: 17 LESSON 6 : B5( P. 36)
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM: To help ss to know comparatives and supperlatives of irregular adjectives.</b>
<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use comparatives and </b>


superlatives of irregular adjectives and long adjectives.


<b>SKILL : listening , writing, speaking and reading.</b>
<b>TEACHING AIDS :Textbook, poster, board.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


8’


6’


<b>I.REVISION :</b>
<b>* Word cue drill :</b>
Nam 1,35 m


Ba 1,45 m
Tam 1,60 m


→ Ba is taller than Nam.
Tam is taller than Ba.
Tam is the tallest.
<b>II.PRESENTATION:</b>


 <b>Pre-teach vocabulary:</b>


An apartment : căn hộ( situation)
Suitable ( adj) : thích hợp ( translation)
Good-better-the best : tốt –tốt hơn – tốt
nhất


Expensive-more expensive- the most



T gives word cues on
board.


T asks good ss to say
first.


T reviews


Comparation ways .
T remarks and
presents the new
lesson.


T elicits


T and ss model
T checks


pronunciation, stress,


Ss discuss in 3’
Ss say their sentences.


Ss copy down.


Ss guess


Ss repeat chorally and
individually.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

6’


15’


9’


1’


expensive : mắc- mắc hơn-mắc nhất


<b> </b>→ Check vocabulary : ROR


 <b>Presentation dialogue : B5(p.35-36)</b>
+ Model sentences :


<i><b>1. The apartment at number 40 is </b></i>
<i><b>better.</b></i>


<i><b>It’s more expensive.</b></i>


<i><b>2. The apartment at number 79 is the </b></i>
<i><b>best. It’s the most expensive.</b></i>


Form: + Comparatives :
1. <i><b>S+ be + short adj er</b></i>
<i><b>2. S+ be + more long adj</b></i>
+ Superlatives:


<i><b>1. S+be + the short adj +est.</b></i>


<i><b>2. S+be + the most+ long adj.</b></i>
<b>III.PRACTICE :</b>


 <b>Comprehension questions:</b>
B5 : a/-d/ (p.35)


+ Answer key :


a. The one at number 27.
b. The one at number 79.
c. The one at number 79.
d. The one at number 27.


It has 2 bedrooms, a large , modern
bathroom and a kitchen.


<b>IV.PRODUCTION:( picture drill)</b>
 <b>Languague focus 1: (5.p39-40)</b>


a. Cheap-cheaper-cheapest


b. Expensive-more expensive-the most
expensive.


c. Good-better-the best


d. Strong-stronger-the strongest.
<b>+ Example exchange:</b>


a. A is a cheap toy.


b. B is cheaper.
c. C is the cheapest.
V. HOMEWORK :


- Learn the lesson carefully.
- Copy LF 1/ 5(p.39)


- Prepare language Focus 1


kinds of words and
meaning.


T checks
remembering.


T reads the dialogue
first.


T has ss to read again
the text and find the
sentences.


T gives model
sentences.


T and ss analize and
give form, use.


T asks ss to read the
text again and answer


the questions in
groups.


T goes around and
helps.


T corrects
T guides
T models


T corrects.


T consolidates
Asks ss to do


homework and learn
by heart the lesson.


Ss listen to T
carefully.


Ss copy


Ss in groups display.
Other groups remark


Ss do Languague
Focus 1( p.39-40)
Ss work in groups of
three and practice


speaking.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

Week : 6th<sub> </sub>

<b>UNIT 3 : AT HOME</b>



Period : 18 LESSON 7 : LANGUAGUE FOCUS 1
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM: To help ss to do further practice in present simple tense, the “the will future” </b>
and prepositions.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use present simple, the </b>
will future and prepositions of place.


<b>SKILL : listening , writing, speaking and reading.</b>
<b>TEACHING AIDS :Textbook, poster, board.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


7’


5’


10’


<b>I.Prepositions of place :</b>


<b>* Games : Kim’s game 4/ p.39</b>
Where’s my cat ?



a/ It’s under the table.
b/ It’s in front of the chair.
c/ It’s behind the TV.


d/ It’s next to the bookshelf.
e/ It’s on the couch.


<b>II. Present simple tense :</b>


<b>* Fill in the blanks with correct form of </b>
<b>the verbs: ( gap fill ) 1/ p.38</b>
<b>→Answer key :</b>


a/ is-lives-are-goes
b/are-eat-rides-catches
<b>III.Simple future tense :</b>


* Write the things Nam will do/ will not do
tomorrow: (Noughts and crosses) 2/ p.38


T asks ss to look at
their books and look
at the pictures in 3
minutes.


T asks “Where’s my
cat?”


T remarks and
corrects.



T guides
T corrects


Ss uses the


prepositions of place
to practice speaking


Ss fill in the blanks.
Ss corrects


themselves.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

8’


5’


5’


Go post
office 


Call Ba  Read book


Tidy yard  See movie  Watch Tv


Meet minh




Write to
grandmother


Do


homework


<b>Example exchange :</b>


<b>S1: Nam will go to the post office .</b>
<b>S2: Yes, he will.</b>


<b>IV.Occupations :( Lucky numbers)</b>
 <b>Languague focus 6 (p.40)</b>


<b> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10</b>
<b>1. Lucky number</b>


<b>2. a farmer</b>
<b>3. a teacher</b>
<b>4. a fireman</b>
<b>5. a doctor</b>
<b>6. a worker</b>
<b>7. Lucky number</b>
<b>8. a truck driver</b>
<b>9. Lucky number</b>


<b>10. a student</b>


<b>V. Ordinal numbers( Writing ordering )</b>
* Languague focus 3/ p.38


(1) first
(2) second
(3) third
(4) fourth
(5) fifth
(6) sixth
(7) seventh


<b>VI. Is there a ……?/ Are there any……..?</b>
<b> (gap fill)</b>


a/ Are there any books?
- Yes, there are.


b/ Are there any airmchairs ?
- No, there aren’t.


c/ Is there a telephone ?
- No,there isn’t.


d/ Are there any flowers ?
- Yes, there are.


T explains the games
T models with a


good student.
T divides the class
into 2 teams.


T remarks and
congratuates.


T explains the game


T remarks and
corrects


T congratuates the
winner team


T guides ss to
arrange the ordinal
numbers.


T remarks and
corrects


T asks ss to work in
pairs .


minutes.


2 teams compete
Ss copy down



Ss choose and say
the correct jobs and
compete in teams.


2 teams compete


Ss do individually
Ss say


Ss copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

4’


1’


<b>VII.Question words:</b>


<b>* Write the questions and answers:</b>
(Questions and answers)
1/ What is his name?


- His name is Pham Trung Hung.
2/ How old is he?


- He is twenty-five.
3/ What is his address ?


- His address is 34 Nguyen Bieu street.
4/ What is his job ? What does he do ?
- He is an office manager.



<b>VIII. Homework:</b>


- Learn by heart vocabulary from Unit 1 to
Unit 3 for Test One period.


T gives corrections.


T models


T corrects
T aks ss to do


exercises carefully at
home to do test one
period.


Ss write the
questions and the
answers from the
cues words in the
box.


Ss ask and anwer in
pairs.


Ss listen to T and
take notes


Week : 7<b>th<sub> </sub></b>

<b>TEST ONE PERIOD</b>



Period : 19 FROM UNIT 1 TO UNIT 3
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM: To help ss to remember the knowledge from unit 1 to unit 3.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to develop skills : </b>
listening, reading, writing and speaking.


<b>SKILL : listening , writing, speaking and reading.</b>
<b>TEACHING AIDS : photocopied test</b>


PROCEDUCE:
<b>Name :</b>


<b>Class: 7</b> <b>TEST ONE PERIODENGLISH 7</b>


Marks : Teacher’s remarks


I.<b>LISTENING :(2,5ms)</b>


* Listen and fill in the blanks of the table with the correct age, job and place of work:


<b>Name</b> <b>Age</b> <b>Job</b> <b>Place of work</b>


Mrs Lien high school


Mr Tuan 36



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

II.<b>READING:(2,5ms)</b>


<b> *Read the passage and do the exercises:</b>


Nam is a new student in class 7A. He is from Tra Vinh but he lives
in Ho Chi Minh city now. He lives with his sister, Mai. He has a lot of friends
in Tra Vinh. In Ho Chi Minh city , there are many different things. His new
school is bigger than his old school. There are many students and teachers.
His old school doesn’t have lots of students. Nam misses his parents and
friends so he feels unhappy.


1/ Answer the questions:


a/ Where is Nam from ?


……….
b/ Does he have many friends in Ho Chi Minh city?


……….
c/ How is his new school ?


……….
2/ Answer True or False :


………..a/ Nam is a new student in class 7A.
………..b/ He lives in Hue with his parents now.
………..c/ He has lots of friends in Tra Vinh.


………. d/ He feels happy because he has many new friends in Ho Chi
Minh city.



III.<b>VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR:(2,5ms)</b>


 <b>Choose the best option to complete each sentence :</b>
1/ Lan and Nga ……….. new students in class 7B.


a/ is b/are c/ am d/ be


2/ He ……….. to school by bike everyday.


a/ go b/ to go c/ goes


d/going


3/ They ………working on the farm very much.


a/ love b/ loves c/ to love d/


loving


4/ How ……….is it from your house to school ?


a/ long b/ much d/ old d/ far


5/ She does the housework and helps on the farm. She is a
………..


a/ nurse b/ farmer c/ journalist d/


housewife



6/ He teaches in a school . He is a………..


a/ doctor b/ teacher c/ worker d/


singer


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

a/ study b/ studying c/ will study d/
studies


8/ A is strong. B is ……… . C is the strongest.


a/ more strong b/ stronger c/ strongest d/
strong


9/ ……… there any flowers in the living room?- Yes, there are.


a/ Are b/ Is c/ Am d/ Do


10/ What a ……….. house!


a/ love b/ lovely c/ loves d/ to


love


IV<b>. WRITING :(2,5ms)</b>


 <b>Look at the card and write the questions and answers: </b>


<b>Example : 0. What’s her name ?</b>



- Her name is Nguyen Phi Nhung.


1/……….
………..
2/……….
………..
3/………..
………..
4/………..
………..
5/……….
……….


THE END
LISTENING PART:


Mrs Lien is a teacher. She is 29 years old. She teaches at a high
school.


Mr Tuan is 36 years old. He is a farmer. He works on the farm.
Mr Hai is 40. He is a doctor. He takes care of children in a hospital.


Name: Nguyen Phi Nhung
Age : 30


Address: 333 Dien Bien Phu Street , Tra Vinh
Job: a journalist.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

Week : 7<b>th<sub> </sub></b>

<b>CORRECTION THE TEST</b>



Period : 20 FROM UNIT 1 TO UNIT 3
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM: To help ss to correct their mistakes in the test in knowledge from unit 1 to </b>
unit 3.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to develop skills : </b>
listening, reading, writing and speaking.


<b>SKILL : listening , writing, speaking and reading.</b>
<b>TEACHING AIDS : photocopied test</b>


<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


I.<b>LISTENING :(2,5ms)</b>


* Listen and fill in the blanks of the table with the correct age, job and place of work:


<b>Name</b> <b>Age</b> <b>Job</b> <b>Place of work</b>


Mrs Lien 29 teacher high school


Mr Tuan 36 farmer farm


Mr Hai 40 doctor hospital


II.<b>READING:(2,5ms)</b>



<b> *Read the passage and do the exercises:</b>


Nam is a new student in class 7A. He is from Tra Vinh but he lives
in Ho Chi Minh city now. He lives with his sister, Mai. He has a lot of friends
in Tra Vinh. In Ho Chi Minh city , there are many different things. His new
school is bigger than his old school. There are many students and teachers.
His old school doesn’t have lots of students. Nam misses his parents and
friends so he feels unhappy.


1/ Answer the questions:


a/ Where is Nam from ?


………Nam is from Tra vinh………
b/ Does he have many friends in Ho Chi Minh city?


………No, he doesn’t………
c/ How is his new school ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

……T………..a/ Nam is a new student in class 7A.
……F………..b/ He lives in Hue with his parents now.
……T………..c/ He has lots of friends in Tra Vinh.


…… F……. d/ He feels happy because he has many new friends in Ho Chi
Minh city.


III.<b>VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR:(2,5ms)</b>


 <b>Choose the best option to complete each sentence :</b>
1/ Lan and Nga ……….. new students in class 7B.



a/ is <b>b/are</b> c/ am


d/ be


2/ He ……….. to school by bike everyday.


a/ go b/ to go <b>c/ goes</b>


d/going


3/ They ………working on the farm very much.


<b>a/ love </b> b/ loves c/ to love d/
loving


4/ How ……….is it from your house to school ?


a/ long b/ much d/ old <b>d/ far</b>


5/ She does the housework and helps on the farm. She is a
………..


a/ nurse b/ farmer c/ journalist <b>d/ </b>


<b>housewife</b>


6/ He teaches in a school . He is a………..


a/ doctor <b>b/ teacher</b> c/ worker d/



singer


7/ We ………. in a new school in 2010.


a/ study b/ studying <b>c/ will study</b>


d/ studies


8/ A is strong. B is ……… . C is the strongest.


a/ more strong <b>b/ stronger </b> c/ strongest
d/ strong


9/ ……… there any flowers in the living room?- Yes, there are.


<b>a/ Are </b> b/ Is c/ Am


d/ Do


10/ What a ……….. house!


a/ love <b>b/ lovely</b> c/ loves d/ to


love


IV<b>. WRITING :(2,5ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

<b>Example : 0. What’s her name ?</b>



- Her name is Nguyen Phi Nhung.


1/…How old is she?………
………- She is 30………
2/…Where does she live?/ What’s her address ? ………
………- She lives at 333 Dien Bien Phu Street .………..
3/…What’s her job?/ What does she do ? ………
………- She is a journalist.………
4/…What’s her telephone number? ………..
………- Her telephone number is 0908882838 ………
5/…How does she go to work? ………
………- She goes to work by bus ………


THE END
Name: Nguyen Phi Nhung


Age : 30


Address: 333 Dien Bien Phu
<i><b>Street , Tra Vinh</b></i>


Job: a journalist.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

Week : 7<b>th<sub> Unit 4 At School </sub></b>
Period : 21 Lesson 1: A1,2,4(p.42-43)
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM: To help ss to tell the time, school vocabulary and present tense.</b>



<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to tell the time, learn </b>
school vocabulary and the simple present tense.


<b>SKILL : listening , writing, speaking and reading.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk, pictures and posters.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


<b>7’</b>


<b>6’</b>


<b>2’</b>


<b>I.REVISION:</b>


<b>* Game: A1(p.42) Noughts and crosses</b>


7.00 4.15 1.45


8.30 9.40 11.5


6.35 8.25 3.10


Example exchange:
S1: What time is it?


S2: It’s seven o”clock.



<b>II.PRESENTATION:</b>
* Pre-teach vocabulary :
Physics : môn vật lý (situation)


Physical education: môn thể dục.(action)
→Check vocabulary : Slap the board
Georaphy


Physics Music


Physical education Math


 <b>Model sentences: A</b>4(P.43) Picture


S1: What is Lan studying ?


S2: Lan is studying Physics.


S1: What time does Lan have her Physics


T explains this game.
T divides class into 2
teams to take part in the
game “ noughts and
crosses”


T remarks and
congratuates.
T elicits
T models


T checks
pronunciation,


stress, meaning, kind of
words.


T checks vocabulary by
slap the board.


T remarks and
congratuates.


T sets the scene Picture
1


T models


<b>Ss take part in the game</b>
in 2 teams. Ask and
answer with “What time
is it?”


Ss guess
Ss repeat
Ss copy
Ss in 2 teams


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

<b>19</b>
<b>’</b>



<b>10</b>
<b>’</b>


<b> 1’</b>


class?


S2<b>: She has her Physics class at 8.40.</b>


<b>III. PRACTICE : picture drill</b>
 <b>Picture A4 (p.43)</b>


2/Binh / Georaphy/ 10.10
S1: What is Binh studying ?


S2: Binh is studying Georaphy.


S1: What time does Binh have her Geography


class?


3/Hung/ English/9.20.
4/Loan/ Music/ 3.30.
5/Hoa/ Math/ 1.50.


6/Mi/ Physical education/ 2.40.
<b>IV.PRODUCTION : A</b>2(p.42)


 <b>Answer about you : Discussion</b>
a/ What time do you get up?



b/ What time do classes start?
c/ What time do they finish?
d/ What time do you have lunch?
e/ What time do you go to bed?
<b>V.HOMEWORK:</b>


- Learn by heart vocabulary.
- Copy A1,2,4.


- Prepare A3,5


T reminds the present
progressive tense and
use She/He and her/his.
T asks ss to look the
pictures and tell what’s
subject? / What time is
it?


T moves around and
helps less ss.


T gives correction.


T guides ss to answer
the questions.


T corrects



T asks ss to exercises at
home and learn by heart
the lesson.


Ss copy down.
Ss answer


Ss work in pair to
practice.


Ss display closed pair
and opened pair.


Ss discuss with their
partner.


Ss display


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

Week : 8<b>th<sub> Unit 4 At School </sub></b>
Period : 22 Lesson 2: A3,5(p.43-44)
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM: To help ss to listen for details and school vocabulary.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen for details.</b>
<b>SKILL : listening , writing, speaking and reading.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk, pictures and posters.</b>


PROCEDUCE:


5’


4’


6’


6’


I.WARM UP: Wordsquare


P I C T U R E S S


H I S T O R Y T T


Y S I C S N H A U


S U X A B S W R D


I M T N I X U T Y


C O H L Y M A T H


A M G E O G R A P


L N C L A S S E S


E D U C A T I O N



<b>II. PRE-LISTENING:</b>
<b>* Pre-teach vocabulary:</b>


Schedule : thời khóa biểu(example)
Important: quan trọng(tranlation)
→Check vocabulary: ROR
<b>* Open prediction:</b>


Five subjects on Wednesday and Thursday
- English







<b>-III.WHILE-LISTENING:</b>
<b>* Check open prediction:</b>
Thu’s schedule


-English
-Math
-Geography


T prepares it on a
poster.


T explains this game.
T sticks the poster on
b.



T models →,↓, ,…..
T remarks and corrects.
T congratuates the
wining team.


T elicits


T and ss model
T checks


pronunciation, stress,
meaning and kinds of
words.


T checks again by
ROR


T sets the scene


T gives feedback.
T reads the dialogue
two times


Ss do the game into
2 teams.


Ss remark.


Ss guess


Ss repeat
Ss copy


Ss guess and write
on b


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

12


5’
6’


1’


-Physical education
-Music


<b>* Complete the schedule: A</b>3(p.43)(gap fill)


Friday


7.00 <b>7.50</b> 8.40 <b>9.40</b> 10.30


<b>English</b> Geography <b>Music</b> Physics <b>History</b>


Saturday


<b>1.00</b> 2.40 <b>3.40</b> 4.30


Physical



education <b>Math</b> English <b>Physics</b>
<b>IV. POST-LISTENING:</b>


<b>*A5(p.44)</b>


- Write students’ schedule
<b>* Comprehension question:</b>


1/ When does Thu have English classes?
2/ What time do they start?


3/ What other classes does Thu have on Thursday?
4/ What’s Thu’s favorite subject?Why?


5/ What’s Hoa’s favorite subject?Why?
<b>V.HOMEWORK:</b>


-Copy A3,5 carefully.


-Learn by heart the lesson.
-Prepare A6(p.44-45)


T reads again.


T opens the tape three
times.


T open the tape again.
T corrects



T models and guides


T asks ss to answer a a
question.


T gives correction.
T consolidates
T assigns


Ss listen to the tape
and fill in the
blanks with the
time and the
subjects.


Ss go to the board
and fill in the
blanks.


Ss copy


Ss write schedule
Ss work in group to
answer these
questions


Ss take notes
carefully .
Ss do exercises at



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

Week : 8<b>th<sub> Unit 4 At School </sub></b>
Period : 23 Lesson 3: A6(p.44-45)
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM: To help ss to read for details and compare an American school with a </b>
Vietnamese school.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for details.</b>
<b>SKILL : writing, reading.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk, pictures and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


<b>4’</b>


<b>8’</b>


<b>6’</b>


<b>I.WARM UP:</b>
<b>* Jumbled words:</b>
Duleches = schedule
Solcho = school
Lascses= classes
Sonles = lesson
<b>II.PRE-READING:</b>



 <b>Pre-teach vocabulary:</b>
Uniform: đồng phục(example)
A break: giải lao(explanation)


A cafeteria : quán ăn tự phục vụ(situation)
A snack: thức ăn nhẹ(realia)


(to) sell: bán(situation)
→Check vocabulary: ROR


 <b>True/False statements prediction:</b>


+ Set the scene: A6(p.45) School in the USA.


a/ Stuadents do not usually wear school
uniform.


b/ There are classes on Saturday morning.
c/ Students don’t have a break in the
afternoon.


d/ The school cafeteria sells food to students.
e/ The school cafeteria only opens at


lunchtime.


f/ Basketball is an unpopular sport after school
activity.


a b c d e f



<b>III.WHILE-READING:</b>


T prepares these words
on a poster and sticks it
on b.


T models.
T remarks.


T elicits .


T and Ss model.


T checks pronunciation,
meaning, stress and
kind of words.
T checks by ROR
T prepares the


True/False statements
on a poster on b.


T gives feedback.


T corrects


Ss do


Ss write on b.



Ss guess.
Ss repeat.
Ss copy.


Ss close their books .
Ss guess T/F and give
on b.


Ss open their books and
read silently in 5


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

<b>8’</b>


<b>10’</b>


<b>8’</b>


<b>1’</b>


 <b>Check true/ false prediction :</b>


a.T b.T c.F d.T e.F
f.F


* Grid:


ACTIVITIES IN THE USA IN


VIETNAM


School


uniform x √
Classes start


at 8.30 7.00
School day


ends at


3.30 – 4.00 11.00
Lessons on


Saturday x √
Students have


lunch at
school


√ x
<b>IV.POST-READING:</b>


 <b>Information writing:</b>


There is usually no school uniform in the
USA. Classes start at 8.30 each morning and
the school day ends at 3.30 or 4 o’clock. There
are no lessons on Saturday.


→There is usually school uniform in Vietnam.


Classes start at 7.00 each morning and the
school ends at 5.15. There are lessons on
Saturday.


<b>V.HOMEWORK:</b>


- Learn by heart the lesson.
- Copy transformation writing.
- Prepare B1.


T sticks a poster on a b.


T corrects


T asks ss to look at the
paragraph on b.


T guides ss to write
another paragraph and
transform some details.
T corrects.


T assigns and
consolidates


vocabulary, writing and
reading skill.


Ss read the text again
and fill in the grid and


compare with the
activities in VN and
USA.


Ss work in pairs some
pairs go to b.


Ss corrects.


Ss work in groups and
stick them on b.


Ss correct.


Ss take notes.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

Period : 24 Lesson 3: B1,2(p.47-48)
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM: To help ss to know prepositions of place “ at the back/front/on the left / on </b>
the right/in the middle” to describe the position of books in the library and practice
library vocabulary.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for details and use </b>
prepositions.


<b>SKILL : writing, reading.</b>



<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk, pictures and posters.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


8’


3’


5’


10’


<b>I .PRE-READING:</b>
<b>* Pre-teach vocabulary:</b>
A library : thư viện
A n<i><b>o</b></i>vel : tiểu thuyết


A r<i><b>ea</b></i>der : người đọc, sách tham khảo.
A r<i><b>e</b></i>ference book : sách tham khảo.
A d<i><b>i</b></i>ctionary : tự điển


A rack : giá đỡ


In the m<i><b>i</b></i>ddle (prep.) : ở giữa
(to) find : tìm


→ Check vocabulary : Slap the board.
<b>* Pre-questions:</b>


1/When is the library open?



2/What kinds of books are there in the
library?


<b>II.WHILE-READING:</b>
<b>* Check pre-questions:</b>


1/The library opens at 7 a.m.


2/ There are science books, reference books,
readers, history, geography, dictionary,


literature….


<b>* Comprehension questions:</b>
+Answer key:


a/The magazines are on the racks.
b/The newspapers are on the racks.
c/The math and science books are on the
shelves on the left.


d/ The history and georaphy books, dictionaries
and literature Vietnamese are on the shelves on
the right.


e/ The books in English are at the back of the


T elicits
T models



T checks pronunciation,
meaning, kinds of
words and stress.
T checks by slap the
board


T sets the scene.


T asks ss to open their
books to read and check
the pre-questions.
T gives correction.
T requests ss to read the
text again to answer the
questions.


T moves around the
class to help the less ss.
T gives corrections to
the ss.


Ss guess


Ss repeat individually
and chorally.


Ss copy down


Ss guess



Write on the board.
Ss open their books to
read to find the


answers.


Ss work in pairs to
answer the questions.
Ss display their
answers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

10’


7’
2’


library.


f/The library opens at 7 a.m.
g/The library closes at 4.30 p.m.
<b>*B2(p.48)</b>


<b>+Model sentence:</b>


Where can I find the Math books, please?
-They are on the shelves on the left.
<b>+Word cue drill:</b>


1/Science books/ on the right.
2/reference books/on the left.


3/magazines/in the midle.
4/biology books/at the front.
<b>IV.POST-READING:</b>


<b>*Write it up: the word cue drill.</b>
<b>V.HOMEWORK:</b>


-Learn the lesson carefully.
-Copy the answer questions.
-Prepare B3,4.


T models to ss the
questions and the
answers.


Ss helps less ss


T guides ss to wtite
again what they said.
T assigns.


Ss copy


Ss work in pairs to
practice.


Ss display opened-pair,
closed-pairs and


opened-pairs.


Ss take notes .
Ss do exercises at
home.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

Date of teaching :


<b>AIM: To help ss to read for details and further practice in comparatives and </b>
superlatives.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for details and </b>
listen to the positions of the books in the library.


<b>SKILL : reading and listening.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk, pictures and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDURE:</b>


5’


5’


5’


5’
12’


<b>I.WARM UP: (Chain game)</b>
Ex:


S1: There are science books in the library.



S2: There are science books and readers in the


library.


S3: There are science books, readers and


newspapers in the library.


S4: There are science books, readers and


newspapers,


and dictionaries in the library.
<b>II.PRE-READING:</b>


 <b>Pre-teach vocabulary:</b>
(to) rec<i><b>ei</b></i>ve : nhận


(to) cont<i><b>ai</b></i>n: chứa


empl<i><b>o</b></i>yees: lao động, nhân công.
→Check vocabulary: ROR


 <b>True/Fasle prediction:(B</b>4/p.49)


+ The library of Congress:


1/ The library of congress is in New York.
2/ It receives copies of all English books.


3/ There are over 100 million books in this
library.


4/ The shelves are about 300 km long.
5/ 5.000 people work in the library.
<b> III.WHILE-READING:</b>


* Check True/False prediction:
1.F 2.F 3.T 4.F 5.T
* Comprehension Questions: a/- f/
+Answer key :


a/It’s in Washington D.C, the capital of the
USA.


b/It has over 100 million books.
c/It has about 1.000 km of shelves.
d/Over 5.000 people work there.


T explains this game.
T asks ss to go to b.


T remarks and corrects
T elicits


T models


T checks pronunciation,
meaning, kinds of
words, and stress.


T checks by ROR.
T sets the scene.
T models


T gives feedback.


T guides ss to open their
books and read to check
T/F predictions


T asks ss to ask and
answer the questions in
groups.


T moves around and
help less ss.


T corrects
T sets the scene.


4 ss take part in this
game.


Some groups display.


Ss guess
Ss model too


Ss repeat individually
and chorally.



Ss copy down.
Ss guess


Ss dispay their ideas on
b.


Ss correct the T?F ?
Ss work in groups


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

12’


1’


e/Because it receive copies of all American
books.


IV.POST-READING:
*B3:(p.48) listening
The pictures


Where are they?


Label the shelves and racks in Ss’ books.
+Answer key:


1: Study center /area.
2: Science and Math
3: Geography, History



4+5 : Newspapers and Magazines.
6+7 : English


8: Librarian’s desk
<b>V.HOMEWORK:</b>


-Learn the lesson carefully.


-Do and write it up “Word cue drill”
-Prepare B3,4(p.49)


T reads the paragraph
three times


T reads again and
corrects.


T asks ss to do
homework.


And learn by heart the
vocabulary.


Ss listen to T carefully.
Ss take notes what they
heard .


Ss go to b and fill.
Ss correct.



Ss take notes carefully.


Week : 9<b>th<sub> Unit 5 WORK AND PLAY </sub></b>
Period : 26 Lesson 1: A1(p.51-52)
Date of preparation :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

<b>AIM: To help ss to review the simple present tense to talk about school subjects.</b>
<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the school </b>
subject with the simple present tense.


<b>SKILL : reading and listening.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk, pictures and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDURE:</b>
10’
3’
2’
5’
5’

10’
<b>I.PRE-READING:</b>
<b>*Pre-teach vocabulary:</b>


(to) learn = (to) study : học(situation)
(to) use : sử dụng(explanation)


How to use : cách sử dụng(situation)


(to) be <i><b>in</b></i>terested in: say mê ,yêu thích.(translation)


a map : bản đồ(drawing)


an exp<i><b>e</b></i>riment : thí nghiệm (explanation)
last : cuối(example)


→Check vocabulary: ROR
<b>*Presentation text: A1(p.51)</b>
+ Set the scene:


Mai is a student at Quang Trung school.
<b> +Pe-questions:</b>


1/How many days a week does Mai go to school?
2/What does Mai learn about at school?


<b>II.PRACTICE:</b>


*Check pre-questions:


1/Mai goes to school six days a week.


2/Mai learns about different things at school.
<b>* Read the text again and fill in the grid.</b>


Classes What to do
Computer


Geography
Physics



Learns how to use a computer
Studies maps and learns about
different countries.


Does some experiment
* Ask and answer:


+ Model sentences:


S1: What does Mai study in her Computer class?


S2: She learns how to use a computer.


→Ss ask and answer about Mai.


1/What does Mai study in her Geography class?
2/What does Mai learn at Physics class?


3/What is her favorite subject?
4/What subject are you good at?
<b>III.PRODUCTION:</b>


*Transformation writing:


T elicits
T models
T checks the
meaning,


ponunciation,kinds of


words, stress.


T checks again by
ROR.


T sets the scene.
T presents the text.
T asks ss some
questions.


T asks ss to open
their books.


T reads(turns on the
cassette ) the text.
T guides ss to read
again the text and
find the information
to fill in the grid.
T gives model
sentences and
explains the
grammar.


T gives corrections.


Ss guess
Ss model


Ss repeat chorally and


individually.


Ss copy


Ss follow T


Ss guess to answer.
Ss write their answers
on b.


Ss open their books
and read to find the
answers for checking.
Ss work individually
to fill in the grid.
Ss correct themselves.
Ss copy.


Ss work in pairs and
practice.


Ss display.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

9’


1’


<b>Ex: I am a student at An Truong C secondary </b>
school.



I go to school six days a week.My claasses always
begin at 7 and finish at 11.30.


……….
<b>IV.HOMEWORK:</b>


- Learn the lesson carefully.
- Copy A1


-Prepare A2( p.52-53)


T asks ss to base on
the text to talk about
Mai .


Now they write about
themselves.


T remarks and
corrects.


T asks ss to learn the
lesson carefully at
home and do the
exercises.


Prepare A2.


paragraph on b.



Ss take notes what T
requested.


Week : 9<b>th<sub> Unit 5 WORK AND PLAY </sub></b>
Period : 27 Lesson 2: A2(p.52-53)
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about activities at </b>
school.


<b>SKILL : reading and listening.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk, pictures and posters.</b>
PROCEDUCE:
5’
7’
5’
6’
3’
10’
8’
<b>I.REVISION:</b>
<b>*Questions:(chatting)</b>


1/What time do your classes begin?
2/What do you learn about at school?
<b>II.PRE-READNG:</b>



<b>*Pre-teach vocabulary:</b>


(to) enjoy: yêu thích(translation)


(to) repair: sửa chữa(máy móc) (situation)
(to) fix: sửa chữa(nói chung) (synonym)
(to) be good at : giỏi về.(example)


An art club: câu lạc bộ nghệ thuật(situation)
Electronics: ngành điện tử(explanation)
→Check vocabulary:ROR


<b>*True/false statements prediction:</b>
1/Ba enjoys his school very much.
2/His favorite subject is electronics.


3/In this class, he does some experiments.
4/He is not good at fixing things.


5/He can help his parents at home.
6/He never goes to art club.


<b>III.WHILE-READING:</b>


<b>*Check True/False prediction:</b>


1/T 2/T 3/F 4/F 5/T 6/F
*Guessing the meaning:


A household appliance bức họa


A drawing đàn ghita
An artist thiết bị gia đình
The guitar họa sĩ


*Comprehension questions: A2(p.53) a-e
+Answer key:


a/He likes Electronics best.
b/Yes, he does.


c/He learns to repair household appliances.
d/He can fix the lights, the washing machine , an
refrigerator.


e/ Yes, he is.


<b>IV.POST-READING:</b>
*Survey: f/-h/


T asks ss to
answer some
questions in the
last lesson.
T elicits
T models
T checks the
pronunciation,
meaning, kinds of
words, stress.
T checks by ROR.


T sets the scene
and guides ss to
predict T?F?
statements.
T models first.
T gives feedback.
T requests ss to
open their books
and read the text
for checking T/F
predictions.
T corrects.
T prepares the
words on a poster
and sticks it on b.
T models T
corrects.


T has ss read the
text again and
answer the
questions in
groups.


Ss answer.


Ss guess and
model.
Ss repeat
chorally and


individually.
Ss copy.
Ss follow T
Ss guess and say
their predictions
on b.


Ss read the text
in 5 minutes and
correct


themselves.
Ss read the text
and find the
meaning of the
words.


Ss work and
discuss to
answer


the questions.
Ss display their
answers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

1’


Name Favorite
subject



Good at Free time
activities
Trang


Mi
Linh


Physics Experiment Go to
physics
club.


<b>Ex:</b>


S1: What’s your favorite subject?


S2: It’s Physics.


S1: What are you good at ?


S2: I’m good at doing experiment.


S1: What do you do in your free time?


S2: I go to my Physics club.


<b>V.HOMEWORK:</b>


-Learn the lesson carefully.
-Copy questions A2(p.52)



-Prepare A4,5,6(p.54-55)


T goes around and
helps some groups.
T gives


corrections.


T draws a table on
b.


T guides ss to go
around and
interview their
classmates.


T corrects.


T advises ss to
learn by heart the
vocabulary and do
exercises carefully
at home.


Ss ask their
friends and fill
the information
in the table .
Ss tell them
again in front of


the class.


Ss take notes
what T said.


Week : 10<b>th<sub> Unit 5 WORK AND PLAY </sub></b>
Period : 28 Lesson 3: A4-6(p.54-55)
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

<b>SKILL : reading and listening.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk, pictures and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>
3’
4’
10’
8’
14’


<b>I.WARM UP :(Matching)</b>


<b>* Matching the subjects with the pictures:</b>


Computer science, physical education, Geography,
Electronics, class activity.


<b>II. PRE-LISTENING: A4(P.54)</b>
* Open prdiction:



What subjects Ba and Hoa have on Saturday
morning.


Write the name Ba or Hoa next to the pictures.
<b>III. WHILE-LISTENING:</b>


<b>* Check open prediction:</b>
Ba : d, a, e


Hoa: c, b, e


<b>IV. PRE-READING:</b>
<b>*Pre-teach vocabulary:</b>
an <i><b>e</b></i>ssay : bài văn( example)
an <i><b>e</b></i>vent : sự kiện ( translation)


past and pr<i><b>e</b></i>sent : quá khứ và hiện tại(situation)
c<i><b>a</b></i>lculator: cái máy tính( realia)


→Check vocabulary : ROR


<b>*Match each subject to the correct items:</b>
A6( p.55)


Physical education piano, guitar,
songbooks


Geography graphs, equations,
calculator



Music games, running shoes,
ball


Art map, globe, atlas
Math paint, pencil, paper
+Set the scene: A6(p.55)


What subjects will appear in the text?
<b>V.WHILE-READING:</b>


<b>*Check open prediction:</b>
<b>*Comprehension questions:</b>
a/What do you study at school?
b/What do you learn in Literature?


c/Do you study past and present in History?
d/What subjects do you learn about different


T guides
T corrects.
T sets the scene.
T elicits ss to predict.
T turns on the


cassette .


T opens it the second
time.



T corrects
T elicits
T models
T checks the


pronunciation, kinds
of words, meaning
and stress.


T checks vocabulary
by ROR.


T sticks poster with
the subjects. T
models.


T corrects


T sets the scene and
give question for ss to
predict.


T asks ss to open
their books for
reading.


T has ss read the text
again and answer the
questions.



T moves around and
helps .


Ss looks at the
pictures and match
with the right
subjects.


Ss predict and write
the name next to the
pictures.


Ss listen to the tape
carefully.


Ss correct themselves.
Ss guess


Ss model and repeat
chorally and


individually.
Ss copy down


Ss match them.


Ss predict.


Ss read the text and
check open



prediction.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

5’


1’


countries and their people ?


e/ Do you speak English in Language class?
f/ What other things do you study?


→Answer key:


a/ I study many things.


b/ I learn about books and write essay.
c/ Yes, I do.


d/ I study Georaphy.
e/ Yes, I do.


f/ I study other things such as : Music, sports and
Art.


<b>VI.POST-READING:</b>


<b>*Now discuss with a partner .Odd one out:</b>
Literature author, writing, paintings, stories
History basketball games, famous people,


world


<b> Events, important days.</b>


Science experiments, meter, preposition,
Temperature.


English words, verbs, England, pronouns.
<b>VII.HOMEWORK:</b>


-Learn by heart the lesson.
-Copy A4,5,6


-Prepare B1(p.56-57)


T gives corrections.
T guides.


T corrects.


T asks ss to learn by
heart the vocabulary
and do exercises
carefully at home.


Ss discuss with their
friends to odd one
out.


Ss say their ideas .



Ss take notes
carefully .


Week : 10<b>th<sub> Unit 5 WORK AND PLAY </sub></b>
Period : 29 Lesson 4: B1,2(p.56-57)
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss to know recess activity vocab and revisions of present progressive </b>
tense.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use recess activity </b>
vocabulary with present progressive tense.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk, pictures and posters.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


5’


8’’


3’
4’


3’


<b>I.WARM UP (Brainstorm)</b>
<b> </b>



<b> What do you do</b>
at a break?
Eat


<b>II.PRESENTATION:</b>
 <b>Pre-teach vocabulary:</b>


(to) have fun : trò vui(explanation)
(to) talk about: nói về(translation)
(to) chat : nói chuyện phiếm, tán gẩu.
(example)


(to) play catch/m<i><b>a</b></i>rbles/blindman’s bluff:

(situation)


(to) skip rope: nhảy dây(mine)
(to) ring: reo(example)


p<i><b>o</b></i>pular (adj): phổ biến(translation)
→Check vocabulary: What and where
<b>*Presentation text: B1(p.56)</b>


<b> +Complete the table:</b>
Recess


activities The most popular activity
Meeting



friends


Talking about
Eating


Talking


<b>*Present progressive tense:</b>
<b> She is skipping rope.</b>


They are talking about the last night’s
movies.


Form: S + be( am, is, are) + Ving……
<b>Use: Diễn tả một hành đang xảy ra trong lúc</b>
nói hoặc một khoảng thời gian ở hiện tại.
<b>III.PRACTICE:</b>


T draws a circle on b
and models the activity
that ss do at recess.


T writes them on b.
T corrects and supports
more ideas.


T elicits T models
T checks pronunciation,
meaning, kinds of
words, and stress.



T checks by What and
Where.


T sets the scene.
T guides ss to guess
what ss do at recess.
T gives feedback.
T reads the dialogue.
T asks ss to give the
tense from the dialoge.
T writes model


sentences on b and
gives form, use...


T has ss practice the
present progressive
tense


Ss tell


Ss write on b.


Ss guess
Ss model


Ss repeat chorally and
individually.



Ss copy
Ss guess


Ss fill in the table.
Ss listen to T and
correct the table.
Ss copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

10’


5’


6’


1’


<b> * B1 (p.56) : pictures</b>
<b> a/ - f/ </b>


 <b>Example exchange:</b>


a/ skip rope


S1: What are the girls doing?


S2: They are skiping rope.


IV.PRODUCTION:


 <b>Ask and answer the questions with a </b>


<b>partner:</b>


1/ What do you do at recess?


2/ Do you usually talk with your friends?
3/ What do you usually do after school?
* Listen and match:B2(p.57)


<b> Mai playing catch</b>
Kien playing marbles.
Lan skipping rope.
Ba playing blindman’s
bluff.


<b>V. HOMEWORK :</b>


-Learn the lesson carefully.


-Copy B1(practice pictures B1 a/-f/ )


-Prepare B3 (p.57-58 )


<b> </b>


from the pictures a/-f/.
T moves around and
helps less ss.


T corrects.



T guides ss to free
practice.


T gives feedback.
T requests ss to learn
the lesson carefully.


Ss ask their friends.
Ss speak in front of the
class.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

Week : 10<b>th<sub> Unit 5 WORK AND PLAY </sub></b>
Period : 30 Lesson 5: B3,4(p.57-58)
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss read for details about recess activities in American school.</b>
<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to learn about recess </b>
activities in American school.


<b>SKILL : reading and speaking.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


5’


10’



5’


5’


<b>I.WARM UP:</b>


<b>* Bingo: Topic : Recess activities</b>


play catch/ skip rope/ drink/ play mables/ eat/
play soccer/ play basketball/ chat/ talk to
friends/ listen to music.


<b>II.PRE-READING:</b>
<b>*Vocabulary:</b>


J<i><b>u</b></i>nior high school: trường THCS(example)
S<i><b>e</b></i>nior high school : trường THPT(example)
(to) score a goal: ghi bàn(situation)


(to) rel<i><b>a</b></i>x : thư giản.(situation)
(to) swap : chuyển(mine)


(to) take part in : tham gia.(explanation)
→Check vocabulary : ROR


*Pre-questions:


What do American students do at recess?
<b>III.WHILE-READING:</b>



<b>*Check pre-questions:</b>
<b> -play basketball</b>
-listen to music


- swap the baseball card
- eat


- talk


*Guessing the meaning:


energetic students khắp thế giới
portable CD players bạn qua thư
packets of candy máy nghe CD xách
tay


pen pal chủ yếu


mainly những gói kẹo


T elicits
T gives topic.


T explains the game.
T congratuates
T elicits and models
T checks


pronunciation,
meaning, kind of


words and stress.
T checks by ROR.


T asks ss to read the
text and answer


T corrects


T models first.


Ss say the verbs
Ss take part in the
game individually.


Ss guess and model
Ss repeat


individually and
chorally.


Ss copy


Ss do and gives
their answers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

10’


9’


1’



worldwide những học sinh năng động
 <b>Questions B3(p.58)</b>


a. C
b. A
c. D
d. D


<b>IV.POST-READING:</b>


<b>*B4(P.58): Find someone who:</b>


<b>ACTIVITIES</b> <b>NAME</b>


take part in <b>Mai</b>


play marbles
skip rope
talk to friends
play catch


<b>+Example :</b>


Do you take part in recess activities?
Do you play mables?


<b>V.HOMEWORK:</b>


-Learn by heart the lesson.


-Do exercises carefully.
-Prepare Unit 6


T corrects.


T asks ss to work in
pairs to do the
multiple choice.


T explains and guides
ss to do the game.


T gives corrections.


T requests ss to copy
all the exercises at
home.


Ss do and says their
answers.


Ss work in pairs and
do the exercises.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

Week : 11<b>th<sub> Unit 6 AFTER SCHOOL</sub></b>
Period : 31 Lesson 1: A1(p.60-61)
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :



<b>AIM:To help ss practice speaking about activities after school and getting further </b>
practice in the present prgressive tense.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to learn about after school </b>
activities and use the present progressive tense.


<b>SKILL : speaking and writing</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
PROCEDUCE:
5’
5’
5’
10’
5’
5’
<b>I.PRE-SPEAKING:</b>
<b>*Pre-teach vocabulary:</b>


(to) pract<i><b>i</b></i>ce: thuực hành(situation)
tog<i><b>e</b></i>ther(avd) :cùng nhau (translation)
→Check vocabulary: ROR


<b>*Presentation dialogue: </b>
<b> +Set the scene:</b>


Minh Hoa
+Pre-question:


What is Hoa doing ?


<b>II.WHILE-SPEAKING:</b>


<b> *Listening and check pre-question</b>
Hoa is doing her Math homework.
*Answer the questions: a/-f/
<b>+ Answer key:</b>


b/ They are going to get a cold drink in the cafeteria.
c/He is in the music room.


d/He’s learning to play the guitar.
e/He usually meets his friends.
f/ She likes playing volleyball.
<b>*Practice speaking the dialogue:</b>


<b>*Grammar points:</b>


<b> +Present progressive tense:</b>
I’m doing my math homework.
He’s learning to play the guitar.
+ Suggestion:


Let’s go to the cafeteria.


T elicits
T models
T checks
pronunciation,
kinds of words,
meaning and


stress.


T checks by ROR
T sets the scene.
T gives ss a
question.
T turns on the
cassette .


T asks ss to open
their books and T
opens it again.
T has ss to work
in groups for
answering the
questions.


T moves around
and helps.


T corrects
T asks ss to
practice speaking
the dialogue.
From the


dialogue, T says


Ss guess Ss model
Ss repeat chorally


and individually.
Ss copy


Ss listen to T and
answer the


question.
Ss look at the
dialogue and check
the question right
or wrong.


Ss work in groups
to answer the
questions.


Ss say the answers.


Ss work in pairs to
practice and


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

9’


1’


Let’s invite him.
<b>III.POST-SPEAKING:</b>


 Noughts and crosses:
Lan/do



Homework


These
boys/play
computer
game.


Minh/watch
TV.


You/listen to


music Mai and Hoa/talk The girls/ skip rope.
Nam/play


marbles


Long and
Minh/chat


Ba/play guitar


<b>+Example exchange:</b>
S1:What is Lan doing?


S2:She is doing her homework.


<b>IV.HOMEWORK:</b>
-Copy questions A1 a/-f



-Learn the vocabulary carefully.
-Prepare A2(p.61)


the grammar
points.


T explains the
game and divides
class into 2 teams
to take part in the
game.


T remarks and
congratuates the
winning team.


T advises ss to
learn the lesson at
home and do
homework.


Ss copy.


Ss take part in the
game and compete.


Ss take notes
carefully



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss practice in Adverbs of Frequency with the simple present tense for </b>
after school activities.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use adverbs of </b>
frequency with the simple present for after school activities.


<b>SKILL : speaking and writing</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


5’


10’


20’


<b>I.WARM UP: </b>


<b>*Bingo: The topic : The things that ss do after </b>
<b>school.</b>


Swim, watch TV, play soccer, see a movie, read,
listen to music, go fishing, do housework, go to
the library….


<b>II.PRESENTATION:</b>


<b>*A2(p.61)</b>


<b>a/ Look at the picture.Label the activities of the</b>
<b>pictures:</b>


1/ Reading/ Studying in the library.


2/ Swimming in the pool.
3/ Playing computer games.
4/ Going to the movies.
5/ Playing soccer.
6./ Watching TV.
<b>III.PRACTICE:</b>
<b>b/ Ask and answer:</b>


<b> *What do you do after school?</b>
<b> -I read/study in the library.</b>
<b> I+ V0…………</b>


<b> *How ofen do you read/study in the library </b>
<b>after school?</b>


<b> - I often read/study in the library in the </b>
<b>library after school.</b>


<b> - I+ often +V0…………..</b>
<b> usually</b>


<b> sometimes</b>
<b> always</b>


<b> never</b>


T explains the game
and guides ss to take
part in the game.


T requests ss to tell the
verbs .


T remarks and
congratuates .


T guides ss to describe
the pictures in p.61.


T corrects


T asks ss to practice in
pairs.


T models.


T writes the form on b.


Ss takes notes
Ss take part in the
game.


Ss describe the
pictures and write


the sentences on b.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

9’


1’


<b>IV.PRODUCTION:</b>


<b>*Languague focus 2: 5/ p.71</b>


+ Write sentences about Ba using advebs of
frequency:


→Answer key:


Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunchtime.
Ba sometimes rides bike to school.


Ba always practices guitar after school.
Ba usually does housework in the evening.
Ba often plays computer games.


<b>V. HOMEWORK:</b>


- Learn the lesson carefully.
- Copy A2, languague focus 2


- Prepare A3-4(p.62)


T guides ss to practice



T corrects


T assigns


Ss write the
sentences


Ss takes notes.


Week : 11<b>th<sub> Unit 6 AFTER SCHOOL</sub></b>
Period : 33 Lesson 3: A3-4(p.62)
Date of preparation :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

<b>AIM:To help ss read a text for details about pastime activities.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand about </b>
pastime activities.


<b>SKILL : reading and listening.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


3’


10’


2’



5’


15’


<b>I.WARM UP :</b>
<b>* Chatting:</b>


1/ What do you do after school?
2/ How often do you watch TV/ do
homework/ listen to music/ swim…….?
<b>II.PRE-READING:</b>


 <b>Vocabulary:</b>


sp<i><b>o</b></i>rty(adj): yêu thích thể thao(explanation)
a c<i><b>o</b></i>mic: truyện tranh(realia)


a pr<i><b>e</b></i>sident: người đứng đầu, nhóm
trưởng(example)


a coll<i><b>e</b></i>ctor: người sưu tầm(situation)
aniv<i><b>e</b></i>rsary (n): lễ kỷ niệm (traslation)
celebr<i><b>a</b></i>tion(n): sự tổ chức ăn mừng lễ kỷ
niệm(situation)


coll<i><b>ec</b></i>tion(n): bộ sưu tập(example)
(to) coll<i><b>e</b></i>ct: sưu tầm( situation)


→Check vocabulary: What and where
 <b>Set the scene:( pictures in textbook)</b>


Ba Nga Nam
+ True/ False statement prediction:
a/ Ba, Nga and Nam are students in class
7A.


b/ They like sports very much.
c/ Nga’s favorie pastime is jogging.
d/ Ba likes collecting stamps.


e/Nam plays soccer every afternoon.
f/ Nam usually watches TV.


<b>III.WHILE-READING:</b>


<b>*Check True/False prediction:</b>


1.T 2.F 3.F 4.T 5.F 6.T
 <b>Comprehension questions:</b>


<b> A3(p.62) a-d</b>
<b>→Answer key:</b>


T asks ss to answer
some questions.
T corrects.


T elicits and models.
T checks pronunciation,
meaning, kinds of words
and stress.



T checks again by what
and where.


T sets the scene and
gives True/ False on b.
T models


T gives feedback.
T has ss to open their
books and read the
dialogue to check T/F.
T corrects.


T requests ss to work in
groups for answering the
questions.


Ss answer and give some
ideas.


Ss guess and model.
Ss repeat chorally and
individually.


Ss copy.


Ss guess and tell their
ideas in front of the
class.



Ss open their books and
read .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

9’


1’


a/ Her theater group is rehearing a play for
the school aniversary celebration.


b/ He gets American stamps from Liz, an
American friend.


c/ The stamps collector club meets on
Wednesday afternoons.


d/ Nam never plays games.
<b>IV. POST-READING:</b>
 <b>A4(p.63) : Listening</b>


Mai go to the circus.
Nam go to the school
cafeteria.


Ba watch a movie
Lan tidy the room.
Kien rehearse a play
V. HOMEWORK:



-Learn the lesson carefully.
- Copy A3-4


- Prepare B1(p.64)


T moves around and
helps.


T gives corrections.


T turns on the cassette
three times.


T corrects.


T asks ss to learn by
heart the lesson and do
the exercises carefully.


Ss answer in groups
Ss display their answers
and they correct


themselves.


Ss listen to the tape and
match the names to the
activity.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

Week : 12<b>th<sub> Unit 6 AFTER SCHOOL</sub></b>


Period : 34 Lesson 4: B1(p.64)
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss make suggestions with “Let’s / What about/ Why don’t……?”</b>
<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to develop speaking skill </b>
with making suggestions.


<b>SKILL : speaking, listening, reading and writing </b>
<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


5’


3’


5’


10’


<b>I.PRE-SPEAK:</b>
<b>* Vocabulary:</b>


an as<i><b>i</b></i>gnment : nhiệm vụ, bài tập.(situation)
fun : điều vui vẻ , cuộc vui.(translation)


 <b>Presentation text: B1(p.64)</b>


 Set the scene:( pictures in textbook)


Ba Lan Nam
Hoa


+ Pre-question:


What does Ba/Lan/Nam/ Hoa want to do?
<b>III.WHILE-SPEAK:</b>


<b>*Check pre-question:</b>


<b>-Nam wants to go to the movies.</b>
<b>-Lan wants to go to her house.</b>


<b>-Nam, Hoa, Lan, Ba go to Lan’s house.</b>
 <b>Comprehension questions:</b>


<b> B1(p.64) a/-e/</b>
<b>→Answer key:</b>


a/ Nam wants to go to the movies.
b/ Lan doesn’t want to go to the movies
because there aren’t any good movies at the
moment.


T elicits & models
T checks pronunciation,
meaning, kinds of words
and stress.


T checks vocabulary by


ROR.


T sets the scene
T gives feedback.
T turns on the cassette
two times.


T gives correction.
T guides ss to work in
pairs for answer the
questions.


T moves around to help


Ss guess & model
Ss repeat individually
and chorally.


Ss copy down.
Ss guess.
Ss write their
prediction on b.


Ss listen to T to check
their guessing.


Ss correct themselves.
Ss work in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

5’


5’


6’


5’


1’


c/ Lan wants to listen to some music at her
house.


d/ Hoa doesn’t want to go to Lan’s house
because she has too many assignments.
e/ It’s Saturday.


 <b>Practice speaking the dialogue.</b>


 <b>Grammar points:</b>


<b>+ </b>Suggestions:


1/What about going to the movies?
2/Let’s go to my house.


3/ Why don’t you relax?
4/Let’s go to Lan’s house.


+Respones:


Agreement Disagreement


Yes, let’s Sorry . I can’t.
Good idea. I’m sorry.
<b>IV. POST-SPEAK:</b>


 <b>Write 4 sentences to suggest someone:</b>
<b>+ Example:</b>


1/ What about going fishing this weekend?
2/………
3/ ………...
4/………
* Practice speaking these sentences to
<b>their friends:</b>


S1: What about going fishing this weekend?


S2: Yes, let’s.


V. HOMEWORK:
-Learn the lesson carefully.
- Copy B1(p.64) / Questions a/-e/


- Prepare B2(p.65)


ss to answer the


questions with difficult
questions.


T corrects



T asks ss to practice
speaking the dialogue.
From the dialogue, T
analizes and gives
grammar points to ss.


T has ss to write
sentences about
suggestions.


T corrects.


T asks ss to learn the
lesson and do homework
.


Ss work in pairs to
practice after that
display it.


Ss copy.


Ss write
Ss write on b.


Ss practice speaking


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

Week : 12<b>th<sub> Unit 6 AFTER SCHOOL</sub></b>
Period : 35 Lesson 5: B2(p.65)


Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss read a magazine survey about the most popular activities of </b>
American teenagers and getting further practice in leisure vocabulary.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know about the most </b>
activities of American teenagers .


<b>SKILL : speaking, reading</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


5’


7’


3’


<b>I.WARM UP :</b>
<b>* Brainstorm:</b>


<b> What do you do at</b>


<b> 13 years old? </b>
read


<b>II.PRE-READING:</b>


 <b>Vocabulary:</b>


a t<i><b>ee</b></i>nager : thiếu niên (13-19)(explanation)
a m<i><b>u</b></i>sical instrument: nhạc cụ(example)
a m<i><b>o</b></i>del : mẩu(situation)


a scout: hướng đạo sinh nam (translation)
a guide : hướng đạo sinh nữ (traslation)
→Check vocabulary: ROR.


 <b>Set the scene:( pictures in textbook)</b>
Teenagers in America


+ <i><b>Open prediction</b></i>:


What do American teenagers like to do in
their free time?


T asks ss to answer
T writes them on b.


T corrects


T elicits & models
T checks the


pronunciation, meaning,
kinds of words and
stess.



T checks by ROR.
T sets the scene


T gives open predictions


Ss answer individually.


Ss guess & model
Ss repeat individually
and chorally.


Ss copy
Ss guess


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

20’


9’


1’


<b>III.WHILE-READING: B2(p.65)</b>
<b>*Check open prediction:</b>


1/ Eat in fast food restaurant.


2/Attend youth organizations such as scouts
and guides.


3/ Learn to play a musical instrument such
as the guitar.



4/ Go shopping.
5/ Watch television.
6/ Go to the movies.
7/ Listen to music.


8/ Collect things such as stamps or coins.
9/ Make models of things such as cars or
planes.


10/ Help old people with their shopping or
cleaning.


 <b>Comprehension questions:</b>


<b> a/ Which of the activities in the list of </b>
American teenagers do you think are also
popular among VN teenagers?


b/Are there any kinds of entertainment for
teenagers in Vietnam? What are they?
c/ What organizations are there for
teenagers in Vietnam?


<b>→Answer key:</b>
Students’ answers.
<b>IV. POST-READING:</b>
<b>* Discussion:</b>


<b> +Topic:</b>



What do you do in your free time?
Make a list of your group’s favorite activities.
V. HOMEWORK:


-Learn the lesson carefully.
- Copy B2


- Prepare B3(p.66)


T requests ss to open
their books and read to
check open prediction.


T corrects


T asks ss more
questions about the
teenagers in Vietnam
like to do in their free
time.


T gives corrections.
T gives ss a topic to
discuss about the


activities they do in their
free time.


T has ss to learn by heart


the vocabulary and do
exercises at home.


things American ss do in
their free time.


Ss answer freely


Ss tell their ideas infront
of the class.


Ss work in pair to
discuss freely.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

Week : 12<b>th<sub> Unit 6 AFTER SCHOOL</sub></b>
Period : 36 Lesson 6: B3-4(p.66)
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss make an invitation with “Would you like …..?” acceptance of </b>
invitations and people refusal.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to speaking skill with </b>
“Would you like……….?”


<b>SKILL : speaking, writing </b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>



5’


3’
6’


5’


<b>I.PRE-SPEAK:</b>
 <b>Vocabulary:</b>


(to) join: tham gia (situation)
a w<i><b>ed</b></i>ding: đám cưới(example)


you’re w<i><b>el</b></i>come: khơng có chi(translation)
→Check vocabulary: ROR


<b>* Presentation dialogue: B</b>3(p.66)


 <b>Set the scene:( pictures in textbook)</b>
Nga Lan Hoa


<b>+ Listen and gap fill:</b>


1/Nga : It’s my birthday on Sunday.


…(1)……….to my house for lunch?
Lan: Yes,……(2)…………What’s time?
Nga: At one o’clock.



Lan: I’ll be there


Nga: I’ll see you on Sunday.
2/ Nga: What about you, Hoa?


………(3)……….,too.
Hoa: …(4)………,but I’m going to a
wedding on Sunday.


Nga: That’s too bad.


Hoa: ………(5)…………Thanks anyway.
Nga: You’re welcome.


<b>III.WHILE-SPEAK:</b>
<b>*Check listening gap fill:</b>


1.Would you like to come 2.I’d love to.


T elicits & models
T checks pronunciation,
meaning, kinds of
words, stress.


T checks again by ROR.
T sets the scene.


T gives poster with the
dialogue that has some
blanks .



T turns on the cassette
two times.


T gives feedback.


T asks ss to open their
books and correct the


Ss guess & model
Ss repeat chorally and
individually.


Ss copy


Ss write the numbers
from 1-5 and listen to
the tape to fill in the
blanks.


Ss write them on board.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

10’
5’


5’


5’


1’



3.Would you like to come 4. I’d love to.
5.Sorry, I can’t come.


*Practice speaking the dialogue:
<b> * Grammar points:</b>


<b>+ Invitations:</b>


<b>Would you like to come my house?</b>
<b>Yes,I’d love to.</b>


<b>I’d love to , but I’m going to a wedding.</b>
<b>→Giving an invitation.</b>


<b>Answer: accepting or refusing.</b>
 <b>Words cue drill:</b>


a/ Come to party / Yes, I’d love to.
b/ Go out for a walk/ Yes, I’d love to .
c/ Come to my house for party/ I’m not sure.
d/ Go to the library/ I’d love to.


e/ Go to the canteen/ I’m sorry, I can’t.
f/ Go swimming/ I’d love to but I’m busy.
<b>IV. POST-SPEAK:</b>


 <b>Make a similar dialogue:</b>
<b>+Ex:</b>



S1: Would you like to come to my house?


S2: Yes, I’d love to.


V. HOMEWORK:
-Learn the lesson carefully.
- Copy B3


- Prepare Languague focus(p.68-71)


listening gap fill.


T corrects pronunciation
and tone.


From the dialogue, t
asks ss to give the
grammar points about
invitation.


T guides ss to practice
words cues about
invitation.


T corrects.


From the dialogue, T
requests ss to make
similar dialogues to
invite someone to come


their house and go
fishing this weekend. A
dialogue will be


accepted and one will
be refused.


T corrects


T asks ss to do exercises
at home and do


languague focus 2.


Ss practice the dialogue
with their partner.


Ss display their dialogue
in front of the class.
Ss copy


Ss work in pairs.


Ss display


Ss make and talk in
front of the class.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

Week : 13<b>th<sub> Unit 6 AFTER SCHOOL</sub></b>



Period : 37 Lesson 7: Languague Focus 2(p.68-71)
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss practice more about present progressive tense, time, subject </b>
vocabulary.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use effectively the </b>
present progressive tense.


<b>SKILL : speaking, writing </b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


10’


7’’


5’


<b>I.PRESENT PROGRESSIVE TENSE:</b>
<i><b>1/Look at the pictures and use correctly </b></i>
<i><b>the present progressive tense:</b></i>


<i>Lan is doing….</i>
<i>She is writing…..</i>
<i>Mr Thanh is reading….</i>
<i>Mrs Quyen is cooking…..</i>


<i>Lan’s brothers are playing….</i>
<i>Tien is running…….</i>


<b>II. TIME :</b>


<b>*Languague focus 3/p.69:</b>


b/ Lan: What time does the movie start?
Hoa: It starts at seven fifteen.


c/ Mrs Quyen: Will you be home for dinner
tonight?


Mr Thanh: No, I’ll be home at ten thirty.
d/ Miss Lan : Can you come to school early
tomorrow?


Nam: Yes, Miss Lien.


I’ll come at six forty-five
<b>III.SUBJECT VOCABULARY:</b>
<b>*Languague focus 4/p.70</b>


Picture a : ………….. Physical education
Picture b:……….English


Picture c:……….Geography
Picture d:……….Chemistry
Picture e:……….Math



T explains & models
T guides ss to do the
exercises in pairs.
T moves around and
helps less students.


T corrects.


T guides and reminds
the time.


T corrects.


T asks ss to match the
subjects with the
pictures.


Ss understand and do the
exercises.


Ss say their sentences.


Ss make the dialogue
with the correct time.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

6’


8’


8’



1’


Picture f: …………....Histotry


IV. THIS AND THAT ; THESE AND
<b>THOSE:</b>


* Languague focus 2/p.68
a/ This room is very untidy.
b/ Put this bag away.


That isn’t my bag, Mom. This is my bag.
c/ Put these dirty socks in the washing basket.
These socks?


No, those socks on the bed.
d/ Throw away those comics.
But I like these comics , Mom.
<b>V. ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY:</b>
<b>*Languague focus 5/p.71</b>


<b> +</b><i>Write sentences about Ba:</i>
<i>->Answer key:</i>


<i>Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunch time.</i>
<i>He sometimes rides bike to school.</i>


<i>He always practices guitar after school.</i>
<i>He usually does homework in the evening.</i>


<i>He often plays computer games.</i>


<b>VI. MAKING SUGGESTION:</b>
<b>*Languague focus 6/p.71</b>


+<i> Write the possible dialogues:</i>
<i>-> Answer key:</i>


<i>1/Let’s go swimming.</i>
<i> Ok.</i>


<i>2/Should we play table tennis?</i>
<i> I’m sorry, I can’t.</i>


<i>3/Would you like to play basketball?</i>
<i> I’d love to.</i>


<i>4/Let’s go to the movies.</i>
<i> Ok.</i>


<i>5/Would you like to come to my house?</i>
<i> I’m sorry, I can’t.</i>


<i>6/ Let’s play soccer.</i>
<i> I’m sorry, I can’t.</i>


<i>7/Should we play volleyball?</i>
<i>Ok.</i>


<b>VII. HOMEWORK:</b>



- Learn the unit 4 to unit 6 carefully to do the
test


T guides


T gives corrections.
T requests ss to tell
again the adverbs of
frequency.


T has ss to work in
groups.


T helps
T corrects.


T makes a model
dialogue.


T asks ss to make
another dialogue with
their partner.


T help less ss.
T gives corrections.
T asks ss to learn the
lessons and prepare for
test.



Ss work in pairs.


Ss display


Ss remember and write
the sentences about Ba.
Ss display


Ss work in pairs.


Ss display


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

Week : 13<b>th<sub> TEST ONE PERIOD</sub></b>


Period : 38 FROM UNIT 4 TO UNIT 6
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss review vocabulary and grammar points from unit 4 to unit 6 and </b>
develop some skills as : Listening, speaking , reading and writing.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use effectively the </b>
present progressive tense, simple present tense, prepostion of time and place, some
vocabulary subjects, things to do at school; develop skills in English.


<b>SKILL : speaking, writing , listening and writing.</b>
<b>TEACHING AIDS : photocopied test.</b>


<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>



<b>I.</b> <b>GREET AND ORDER:</b>


<b>II.</b> <b>DELIVER THE PHOTOCOPIED TEST:</b>


<b>Name :</b>


<b>Class : 7</b> <b>TEST ONE PERIODENGLISH 7</b> <b>MARK :</b>


<b>I/ LISTENING :</b>


<i><b> *Listen and match the name to each activity : ( 2,5 ms )</b></i>
Ba * * listen to music
Lan * * play catch


Mai * * play blindman’s bluff
Nam * * skip rope


Nga * * play soccer
<b>II/ VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR :</b>


<i><b> * Choose the best option to complete each sentence :(2 ,5ms</b></i><b> )</b>
<b> 1/ She ……… talking to her friends.</b>


a. are b. is c. am d. be
2/ How ………. does he study in the library ? _ He usually studies in
the library.


a. long b. far c. much d. often
3/ We study maps and learn about different countries in



………


a. Literature b. History c. Geography d. Physics
4/ Let’s ……… to my house.


a. go b. to go c. going d. goes
5/ Would you like ………. table tennis ?


a. play b. to play c. playing d. plays
6/ I have English and Math ……… Monday and Friday.
a.in b. at c. on d. between
7/ He sometimes ……… marbles at recess.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

a. to b. on c. at d. in
9/ Eating and talking with friends are the most popular ways of relaxing at
………..


a. home b. recess c. school d. bus stop
10/ They ……….. to the movie theater.


a. is going b. am going c. are going d. be going
<b>III/ READING : </b>


<b> </b><i><b>* Read the text and do exercises : ( 2.5 ms )</b></i>


I am Huy . I’m a student of class 7 B . My school is in the village. I have class in
the afternoon. After school I often go to my uncle’ house . There I play games
with my cousins such as catching, playing marbles ………., and go swimming
in the river near my house.



<b>1/ </b><i><b>Answer True ( T ) or False ( F ) : ( 1m</b></i><b> )</b>


a. Huy’ school is in the city. …..
b. He has class in the afternoon. …..
c. He often goes to the movie theater after school. …..
d. He goes swimming in the river near his house. ….
<b> 2/ </b><i><b>Answer the questions : ( 1.5 ms )</b></i>


a. Which class is Huy in ?


………
b. What does he often do after school ?


………
c. Is he playing marbles with his cousins ?


………
<b>IV/ WRITING:</b>


<i><b> * Write the sentences completely : ( 2.5 ms ) </b></i>
1/ Nam / often / go / library / Sunday.


<i><b> Nam often goes to the library on Sunday.</b></i>
2/ I / sometimes / go / swimming.


………
3/ She / usually / listen / music.


………


4/ Lan and Hoa / always / watch / T.V .


………
5/ They / sometimes / play / computer games .


………
6/ He / seldom / get/ up / 5 o’clock .


………
THE END


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

Hoa: Would you like to come to my house for listening to some music on Sunday,
Lan?


Lan: I’d love to. I’ll come on Sunday.
Hoa: How about you, Ba?


Ba: I’d love to, but I’m going to play soccer with my brothers.
Hoa: Would you like to come, too, Mai?


Mai: Sorry, I can’t come. I’m going to play blindman’s bluff with my sisters.
Hoa: What about coming to my house, Nam?


Nam: I’d love to, but I’m going to play catch at that time .
Hoa: What about you, Nga?


Nga: Sorry, I can’t come. I’m going to skip rope with my friends.
Hoa: I hope you to come with me, Lan.


Lan: Ok. Bye. See you on Sunday.



<b>**************************************************************</b>
Week : 13<b>th<sub> </sub></b>


Period : 39 CORRECTION THE TEST
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss practice more about present progressive tense, time, subject </b>
vocabulary.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use effectively the </b>
present progressive tense, present simple tense.


<b>SKILL : speaking, writing , reading</b>
<b>TEACHING AIDS : photocopied test.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


<b>I/ LISTENING :</b>


<i><b> *Listen and match the name to each activity : ( 2,5 ms )</b></i>
Ba * * listen to music
Lan * * play catch


Mai * * play blindman’s bluff
Nam * * skip rope


Nga * * play soccer
Ba plays soccer.



Lan listens to music.


Mai plays blindman’s bluff.
Nam plays catch.


Nga skips rope.


<b>II/ VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

1/ She ……… talking to her friends.


a. are b. is c. am d. be
2/ How ………. does he study in the library ? _ He usually studies in
the library.


a. long b. far c. much d.
<b>often</b>


3/ We study maps and learn about different countries in
………


a. Literature b. History c. Geography d.
Physics


4/ Let’s ……… to my house.


a. go b. to go c. going d.
goes



5/ Would you like ………. table tennis ?


a. play b. to play c. playing
d. plays


6/ I have English and Math ……… Monday and Friday.


a.in b. at c. on d.
between


7/ He sometimes ……… marbles at recess.


<b> a. plays b. playing c. to play d.</b>
play


8/ My classes start ………. 12 . 45 in the afternoon.


a. to b. on c. at
d. in


9/ Eating and talking with friends are the most popular ways of relaxing at
………..


a. home b. recess c. school
d. bus stop


10/ They ……….. to the movie theater.


a. is going b. am going c. are going
d. be going



<b>III/ READING : </b>


<b> </b><i><b>* Read the text and do exercises : ( 2.5 ms )</b></i>


I am Huy . I’m a student of class 7 B . My school is in the village. I have class in
the afternoon. After school I often go to my uncle’ house . There I play games
with my cousins such as catching, playing marbles ………., and go swimming
in the river near my house.


<b>1/ </b><i><b>Answer True ( T ) or False ( F ) : ( 1m</b></i><b> )</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

<b> 2/ </b><i><b>Answer the questions : ( 1.5 ms )</b></i>
a.Which class is Huy in ?


………Huy is in class 7B


b.What does he often do after school ?


………He plays games, catching , marbles and go swimming.
c.Is he playing marbles with his cousins ?


………Yes, he is.
<b>IV/ WRITING:</b>


<i><b> * Write the sentences completely : ( 2.5 ms ) </b></i>
1/ Nam / often / go / library / Sunday.


<i> Nam often goes to the library on Sunday.</i>
2/ I / sometimes / go / swimming.



…………I sometimes go swimming.
3/ She / usually / listen / music.
…………She usually listens to music.


4/ Lan and Hoa / always / watch / T.V .
………… Lan and Hoa always watch T.V.


5/ They / sometimes / play / computer games .
………… They sometimes play computer games.
6/ He / seldom / get/ up / 5 o’clock .
…………He seldom gets up at 5 o’clock.


THE END
HOMEWORK:


Prepare Unit 7.


Week : 14 <b>th<sub> </sub></b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

<b>AIM:To help ss practice comparatives with “fewer/more” to talk about students’ </b>
work.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use comparatives with </b>
fewer and more .


<b>SKILL : Listening, speaking, reading and writing.</b>
<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>



3


7’


4’


10’


<b>I.WARM UP:</b>
<i><b>* Chatting:</b></i>


1/ What time do your classes start?
2/ What time do your classes finish?
3/ when does your school year start ?
4/ When does it finish?


<b>II.WHILE-SPEAK:</b>
<b>*Vocabulary:</b>


a vac<i><b>a</b></i>tion: kỳ nghỉ lễ(situation)
an hour : giờ( example)


(to) last : kéo dài(translation)


Hard(adv) : vất vả, chăm chỉ(situation)
Late (adv) : trễ, muộn(//)


Early (adv) : sớm-> earlier : sớm hơn(//)
Few (adj) : ít -> fewer : ít hơn(//)



Many (adj) : nhiều -> nhiều hơn(//)
-> Check vocabulary: ROR


*Pre-questions:
<b>+Set the scene:</b>


Uncle ? Hoa
<b> a/What time do Hoa’s classes start?</b>
b/What time do they finish?


c/For many hours a day does Hoa do her
homework?


d/What time will Hoa do during her
vacation?


<b>III.WHILE-SPEAK:</b>


 <b>Checking the pre-questions:</b>
<b>a/ Hoa’s classes start at 7.00.</b>


<b>b/ They finish at a quarter past eleven.</b>
<b>c/She does her homework two hours each </b>
day.


<b>d/She’ll go and see Mom and Dad on their </b>


T asks ss to review the
time.



T corrects.


T elicits & models
T checks pronunciation,
meaning, kinds of
words, stress.


T checks again by ROR.
T sets the scene.


T gives poster with the
pre- questions on b.
T turns on the cassette
two times.


T gives feedback.
T checks their answers
T asks ss to open their
books and correct the
pre-questions.


T corrects pronunciation
and tone.


Ss answer the questions.
Ss say their answers
before the class.


Ss guess & model
Ss repeat chorally and


individually.


Ss copy


Ss listen to the tape to
answer the questions.


Ss write them on board.


Ss correct themselves.
Ss practice the dialogue
with their partner.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

10’
5’


5’


1’


farm


 <b>Practicing the dialogue:</b>
 <b>Compare with the students: </b>


<b>(discussion)</b>


<b>e/ What about you?Do your classes start </b>
earlier or later? Do you work fewer than
Hoa?



<b>f/When does your school year start?</b>
<b>g/ When does it finish?</b>


 <b>Example answer:</b>


e/ My classes start earlier than Hoa’s
classes.


I work fewer than Hoa.


-> fewer/ earlier/ more / later: this is a way
of comparative.


<b>IV. POST-SPEAK:</b>


<b>*Write 5 sentences to use comparative </b>
<b>form of “ fewer /more/ earlier/ later”</b>
<b>+Ex:</b>


<b>1/ My classes start earlier than Hoa’s.</b>
<b>2/I work fewer than Hoa.</b>


<b>3/ Hoa has more vacation than I .</b>
<b>4/ I come to school later than Hoa.</b>
<b>5/ I do homework less hours than Hoa.</b>
V. HOMEWORK:


-Learn the lesson carefully.
- Copy A1( Questions)



- Prepare A2,3(p.73-74)


From the dialogue, T
and Ss say the


comparative.
T writes on b.


T corrects.


T asks ss to write the
sentences about
comparative
T corrects


T asks ss to do exercises
at home and do


languague focus 2.


in front of the class.


Ss copy


Ss work in pairs and
write


Ss display



Ss make and talk in front
of the class.


Ss take notes carefully


Week : 14<b>th<sub> </sub></b>


Period : 41 Unit 7 THE WORLD OF WORK
Date of preparation : Lesson 2: A2-3(p.73-74)
Date of teaching :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for details and </b>
compare American ss’ vacation and Vietnamese ss’ vacation.


<b>SKILL : reading and listening </b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


8’


3’


6’
10’


<b>I.PRE-READING:</b>
<i><b> *Vocabulary:</b></i>


<i><b> E</b></i>aster: lễ phục sinh(translation)


Thanksg<i><b>i</b></i>ving<i><b>:</b></i> lễ tạ ơn(situation)


New Year’s Eve: tết dương lịch(example)
Indep<i><b>e</b></i>ndence day: ngày độc lập(explanation)
Chr<i><b>i</b></i>stmas:lễ giáng sinh(situation)


=> Check vocabulary : slap the board
* Set the scene:( pictures in textbook)
Tim sends a letter to Hoa


<b>+ True or fasle statements prediction:</b>
1/ Vietnamese ss have fewer vacations than
American ss.


2/ American ss have the longest vacation in the
winter.


3/ They don’t have a Tet holiday .


4/ Their most important vacation is New Year.
5/ They usually spend their time with their
families on Thanksgiving and Christmas day.
<b>III.WHILE-READING:</b>


<b>*Check True or False:</b>


1.T 2.F. 3.T 4.F. 5.T
<b>*Grid:</b>


<b>Vacations</b> <b>American ss</b> <b>Vietnamese </b>



<b>ss</b>
Longest vacation In the


summer In the summer
Tet holiday <b> x</b> <b> √</b>
Thanksgiving <b> √ </b> <b> x</b>
Christmas <b> √</b> <b> x</b>
Independence


day <b>July 4</b>


<b>th</b> <sub>September 2</sub>nd


Easter <b> √ </b> <b> x</b>
New Year’s Eve January 1st <sub>December </sub>


30th <sub>lunar</sub>


T elicits & models
T checks


pronunciation,
meaning, kinds of
words, stress.


T checks again by slap
the board.


T sets the scene.



T gives feedback.


T asks ss to open their
books and read .


T corrects


From the dialogue, t
asks ss to read to find
the information to
compare vacation b/w
ss in America and in
Vietnam..


T corrects


T guides ss to answer
the questions in


Ss guess & model
Ss repeat chorally and
individually.


Ss copy


Ss guess T or F
Ss write them on
board.



Ss read the letter and
check T or F


Ss correct themselves.
Ss do and Ss display
their answer on b in
front of the class.
Ss copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

8’


9’


1’


<b> * Comprehension questions:</b>
=> Answer key:


a/ Summer vacation is the longest vacation in
America.


b/ During his vacation, Tim spends time with his
family.


c/ Vietnamese ss have fewer vacation than
American students..


<b>IV. POST-READING:</b>
 <b>A3(p.74):</b>



<b>+Listen. Write the name of the public holiday:</b>
 Answer key:


a/ Thanksgiving
b/ Independence day
c/New Year’s Eve
d/Christmas


V. HOMEWORK:
-Learn the lesson carefully.
- CopyA2-3


- Prepare A4


groups.


T corrects.


T turns on the cassette
player


T corrects


T asks ss to do


exercises at home and
learn the lesson
carefully. Prepare A4


Ss display



Ss open their books
and guess what
pictures are in the
vacation?


Ss listen to T
Ss correct their
guessing


Ss make and talk in
front of the class.


Ss take notes carefully


Week : 14<b>th<sub> </sub></b>


Period : 42 Unit 7 THE WORLD OF WORK
Date of preparation : Lesson 2: A4(p.75)


Date of teaching :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for details and </b>
compare American ss’vacation and Vietnamese ss’vacation.


<b>SKILL : Reading and listening</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>



5’


6’


5’


8’
8’


<b>* Warm up</b>


Write the name of the public holidays in USA
& in VN


<b>I./- Pre - reading </b>
<b>1./ Pre - vocabulary</b>
- a p<i><b>e</b></i>riod : tiết học
- (to) review : ôn tập
- t<i><b>y</b></i>pical (a) : điển hình
- keen : linh hoạt
- l<i><b>a</b></i>zy (a) lười biếng
- d<i><b>e</b></i>finitely : rõ rang ,


*Check : rub out & remember


<b>*Set the scene</b><i> : we are going to read a </i>
<i>passage about a student life </i>


<i>2.</i><b>The amount of time of Hoa Prediction</b>
1. Hoa has ……. periods a day



2. She goes to school …….days a week
3. She works about………..hours a week
4. Before test , she works about ………hours
a week.


5. She has about……….hours of homework.
<b>II./- While - reading </b>


1. Read and checks the prediction
<b>Keys :</b>


1. five 2. six 3. twenty 4. forty five
5. twelve


<i>2. </i><b>Answer the questions</b>


a. Why do some people think that student have
an easy life ?


Because they work a few hours a day and have
long vacations


b. How many hours e week does Hoa work ?


About 20 hours


c. Is this fewer than most workers ? Yes


d. How many hours a week do you work ?



Checks attendances
Has sts to write the
vacations


Teaches new words
following steps for
presenting vocabulary.
Checks by rubs words and
asks sts to rewrite


Introduces the passage
Asks sts to predict the
statements


Gets feedback


Has ts to read the letter
then check the prediction
Checks result


Runs through
Has sts to answer
Checks


Report


List out and write on the
board



Listen and repeat


Listen and repeat after
Teacher


Read all words
Match


Do what teacher asked


Listen


Work in pairs to read
and check the


predictions


Work in pairs to answer
the questions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

10’


3’


( students’ answers )


e. Is that more or fewer hours than Hoa ?
f. Does the writes think students are lazy ?


- No, she doesn’t



<b>III./ - Post reading </b>
*Discussion


How many periods are there to day ?
How many days do you go to school ?
How many hours a day do you study ?
What do you do before test ? How many
hours do you study ?


<b>5/- Home work</b>


Learn by heart new words .Write these
exercises in their notebooks


Hangs poster on
Runs through
Models
Checks result
Consolidates
Comments
Gives homework


Answer the questions
Share with friends
Give the results


Listen and prepare at
home



Week : 15th <sub> Unit 7 THE WORLD OF WORK</sub>


Period : 43 Lesson 2: B1(p.76)
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss introduce about someone’s jobs.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

<b>SKILL : speaking, writing </b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


5’


6’


5’


8’
8’


<b>*- Warm up</b>
<i>Jumble words</i>
1. marfer - <i>farmer</i>
2. theacer


3. cotodr
4. wrkore


5. hufowesei
<b>I./ - Pre - reading </b>
<i>1. Pre teach vocabulary </i>


- part time (a)

 full time : bán thời gian


- home less (a) : vô gia cư


- a machine : maý móc
- a mechanic : thợ máy
- shift (n) : ca làm việc


work in shifts : làm việc theo ca
- the public holiday : ngày lễ


* <i>Check</i> : R & R
<i>* Set the scene: </i>


How many people are there in your family ?
who are they ? What do they do ? How about
Tim ?


<i>2.</i><b>Ordering for main ideas</b>
a.__ Mr. Jones's work


b.__ Tim's introduction about his family
c.__ Mr. Jones's vacation time


d.__ Mrs. Jones’s work
<b>II./ - While – reading</b>



1. Read and check the ordering
<b>Keys :</b>


<b> b – d – a – c </b>
<i>2. </i><b>Questions</b>


a. Where does Mrs Jone'swork ? at home and
part time at a local super market


b. what does she do for home less people ?


cooks lunch


c. What is Mr Jone job ? a mechanic


d. How many hours a week does he usually
work ? 40 hours


e. How do you know the Jones family likes


Checks attendances
Has sts to rewrite the
jumbled words


Reads


Teaches new words
following steps for
presenting vocabulary.
Checks by rubs words


and asks sts to rewrite


Introduces the letter
Asks sts to predict the
statements


Gets feedback


Has ts to read the letter
then check the


prediction
Checks result
Runs through
Has sts to answer
Checks


Report


Write on the board
Listen and repeat


Listen and repeat after
Teacher


Read all words
Rewrite


Do what teacher asked
Listen



Work in pairs to read
and check the


predictions


Work in pairs to answer
the questions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

10’


3’


Florida ? always go there on vacation and
have a great time


<b>III,/ - Post - Reading </b>


Talking about some people in your family
about jobs and vacations


- What does your father/mother…….do ?
- Where ?


- How many hours does he/sh work ?
- What does he/she do on vacations ?
<b>5/- Home work</b>


Learn by heart new words .Write the ans a
paragraph about their jobs



Hangs poster on
Runs through
Models
Checks result
Consolidates
Comments
Gives homework


Answer the questions
Share with friends
Give the results by read
aloud


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 15th


Period : 44 Unit 7 THE WORLD OF WORK
<b> Lesson 2: B2-4(p.77-78)</b>
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about famer </b>
working and others and compare between Mr Tuan, a farmer and Mr Jones, a
mechanic.


<b>SKILL : speaking, writing </b>



<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


5’


6’


5’
8’


8’


<b>I.Warm up:</b>
<b> Chatting </b>


a. What is Mr. Jones’s job ?


b. How many days does he work a week ?
b. How many hours does he have of
working ?


c. What does he play on vacation ?
<b>II./ Pre reading </b>


<b> 1. Pre teach vocabulary</b>
(- to)feed : cho ăn(situation)
- a pig : lợn ,heo(picture)
- a crop : mua vụ(explanation)
-( to) rest : nghỉ ngơi(situation)


- a coop = shed : chuồng(picture)
- real ( a) : thật(translation)
<b>* Checking : Listen and repeat</b>
<b> 2. Set the scene :</b>


<b>III./ While Reading </b>


<b>1. Complete the Grid ( A 3 )</b>
Hours


per week


Days off Vacation
time
Mr.


Jones 40 2 days a week Three weeks


Mr.


Tuan 84 4 or 5 a year No real


<b>2. Comprehension questions </b>


a. What time does Mr. Tuan start work ?
b. What does he do first ?


c. Who does he work with in the fields ?
d. What time does he come back home ?
e. When does he take a day off ?



f. Does he have more or less hour of working
than Mr. Jones ?


Checks attendances
Asks sts some questions


Teaches new words
following steps for
presenting vocabulary.
Has sts repeat all words
Introduces the letter
Asks sts read the
passage then fill in the
grid


Gets feedback
Checks result
Runs through
Has sts to answer
Checks


Hangs poster on
Runs through
Reads the text


Report


Listen and answer the
questions



Listen and repeat after
Teacher


Read all words
Read aloud


Do what teacher asked
Listen


Work in pairs to answer
the questions


Listen and correct


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

10’


3’


<b>IV./ Post Reading </b>


<b>*Listening to the tape then complete the </b>
<b>table </b>


Name Job Hours


per week Amount of
vacation


Peter Doctor 70 4 weeks



Susan Nurse 50 3 weeks


Jane Shop


assistant


35 1 week


Phong Factory
worker


48 2 weeks


<b>* Homework :</b>


- Learn by heart the lesson
- Prepare Unit 8


Checks result


Consolidates
Comments
Gives homework


Gives the result


Listen and prepare at
home



Week : 15th


Period : 45 Unit 8 PLACES


<b> Lesson 1 : A1-2(p.79-80) </b>
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss ask for and give directions.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for and give </b>
directions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>
5’
8’
3’
5’
5’
10’
10’


<b>I./ - Warm up:</b>


<b>1. Matching the pictures with places</b>
<b>Places Names </b>


a. 1. National Bank of VN


b. 2. Saint Paul hospital
c. 3. Hotel


d. 4. The Central post office
e. 5. Ha Noi Rail Way Station
f. 6. Dong Xuan Market
<b>II. PRE-SPEAK:</b>


<b>*Vocabulary:</b>


<b> a souvenir shop: cửa hàng lưu niệm(ex)</b>
(to) go straight ahead: đi thẳng(situa)
(to) take the first street : đi con đường thứ
nhất.(Explanation)


a tourist : khách du lịch(picture)
=>Check vocabulary: ROR


*Set the scene:


<b> Tourist meets Nga and Lan</b>
 <b>Pre-questions:</b>


1/ Where does the tourist want to go?
2/ Is the souvenir shop on Hang Bai street?
<b>III. WHILE-SPEAK:</b>


<b>*Check pre-questions:</b>


1/He wants to go to Hang Bai street and to


the supermarket.


2/Yes, it is.


*Grammar points:


Tourist: Could you tell me how to get
there( to the souvenir shop)?


Could you show me the way to the
supermarket?


 Ask for the way
<b>* Practice the dialogue:</b>
<b>IV. POST-SPEAK:</b>
<b>* Make the dialogue:</b>


1/S1: Could you show me the way to the


restaurant?


S2: Go straight ahead. Take the first street


Gets feedback


Runs through the places
Has sts to name them
Checks


T elicits & models


T checks pronunciation,
meaning, kinds of
words, stress.


T checks again by ROR.
T sets the scene.


T gives poster with the
questions on board .
T turns on the cassette
two times.


T gives feedback.
T asks ss to open their
books and correct the
pre-questions.


T asks ss to find the
question that ask the
way.


T corrects pronunciation
and tone.


From the dialogue, t
asks ss to give the
grammar points .
T has ss to make the
dialogue .



Observer and then match


Read all words


Ss guess & model
Ss repeat chorally and
individually.


Ss copy


Ss open their books and
listen to the tape to
answer the questions.
Ss write them on board.


Ss read the dialogue
after T


Ss read and find the
answers.


Ss correct themselves.
Ss find the questions to
ask for the way.


Ss copy down.


Ss practice the dialogue
with their partner.



Ss display their dialogue
in front of the class.
Ss copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

2’


on the right.
+ Word cues:
1/restaurant
2/hotel
3/post office
4/school


V. HOMEWORK:
-Learn the lesson carefully.
- Copy B3


- Prepare Languague focus(p.68-71)


T corrects.


T asks ss to do exercises
at home and do


languague focus 2.


Ss display.


Ss take notes carefully



Week : 16th


Period : 46 Unit 8 PLACES
<b> Lesson 2 A3 (p.81)</b>
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss practice asking for the way and giving directions.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice asking for the </b>
way and giving directions.


<b>SKILL : speaking, writing </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


5’


8’’


20’


10’


<b>*Warm up</b>
<i>Net words</i>


On the left On the right
opposite


between


<b>I. Presentation structure </b>
A: I need some stamps ?
B: Where's the post office ?


A: It's between the bank and the restaurant
B: It's opposite the hospital


*Concept checks
Form


Usage : Asking for and giving directions to
some places


<b>II./ - Practice </b>


<b>*Look at the map page 81</b>


<b>1. Asking and giving about the direction to</b>
<b>some places :</b>


a. police station


Where is the police station ?


- It's between the post office and the
museum .


- It's opposite the stadium


b. Shoe store


c. book store
d. restaurant
e. hotel
f. post office
g. school
<b>3/ Production:</b>


Go straight ahead to the second street .Turn
left What is on the right ?(a)


Go straight ahead. Turn right into the first
street. What’s on the left next to the


restaurant ?(b) And what’s on your left ? (c)
Go to the second street. Turn right. What is


.Checks attendances
Draws on the board the
key word and asks sts to
list and match


Gets feedback
Read and write the
dialogue on the board
Concept checks
Runs through the map


Has sts work in pairs to


ask and answer


Calls some pairs
speaking


Corrects mistakes


Hangs poster on
Runs through the
questions


Has st to answer the


Report


Thinks and write to the
network.


Read aloud


Do what teacher asked


Listen


Work in pairs to answer
the questions


Listen and correct


Listen to teacher then


answer the questions
Read aloud


Prep of place


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

2’


opposite the hotel ?(d) And what is on your
right ?(e)


Keys :


a. souvenir shop b. shoe store
c. hotel d. drugstore e. hospital
<b>*- Home work</b>


Learn by heart new lesson and words .
Prepare lesson 3 A4-5


question following the
map


Checks


Consolidates
Gives homework


Gives the result


Listen and prepare at


home


Week : 16th


Period : 47 Unit 8 PLACES
<b> Lesson 3: A4-5(p.82)</b>
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss ask and give about the distances from places to places. </b>


OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for and give about
the distances from places to places.


<b>SKILL : speaking, listening</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

6’


5’


8’


<i>Matching the questions with the answers</i>
Questions Answers


1. How often do a. It's about 40 km


you go swimming ?


2. How are you ? b. By bike
3. How do you go c. Fine, thanks
to school ?


4. How old are you ? d. twice a week
5. How far is it from e. I'm 13 years old
here to Da Lat ?


<b>I./- Presentation</b>
<i>*<b>Pre teach vocabulary</b></i>
- a long way : đường xa


- a coach : xe khách chạy đường dài
- a guess : đoán


*Check : Rub out and Remember
*Set the scene


Listen and repeat the Dialogue ( A 4 )
Eg :


How far is it from Hue to HCM city ?
It’s about 1030 km


Form


Usage : asking and giving about the distances
from place to place



<b>II/- Practice </b>


<b>1. Asking the distances from some places</b>
a. Vinh / 319


How far is it from Vinh to Ha Noi ?
It’s about 319 km


b. Hue / 688


How far is it from Hue to Ha Noi ?
It’s about 688 km


c. Da Nang / 791


How far is it from Vinh to Ha Noi ?
It’s about 719 km


d. HCM city / 1.726


How far is it from HCM city to Ha Noi ?
It’s about 1.726 km


<b>2. Ask and answer questions </b>


Hangs poster on and
asks sts to match
Checks



Teaches new words
Calls some sts to repeat
Checks


Reads the dialogue and
asks sts to raed in pairs
Concept checks


Runs through


Has sts to work in pairs
to make the question
then answer them


Calls out the answers
Corrects mistakes


Models


Calls two pairs tp


Thinks and match
Give result


Read all words
Read aloud


Do what teacher asked
Listen



Work in pairs to answer
the questions


Listen and correct


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

8’


10’


3’


<b>( Language focus 3 .2- b)</b>
<b>Eg :</b>


a. How far is it from the clothing store to the
bookstore ?


- It’s about 450 meters


b. How far is it from therestaurant to the
hairdresser’s ?


- It’s about 400 meters


c. How far is it from the mnimart to the library?
- It’s about 300 meters


d. How far is it from the library to the shoe
store ?



- It’s about 800 meters
<b>III./ Production </b>


<b>*. Answer the questions with the ideas given </b>
a. How far is it from Dong Thap to HCM city ?
( 165 km )


b. How far isit from your school to Can Tho ?
c. How far is it from Lai Vung to Cao lanh city?
( 30 km )


d. How do you go to school ?


e. How long does it take you to get school by
bike?


<b>*- Home work </b>


Learn by heart new words, structures
Prepare lesson 4 B1,5


practice first


Asks sts to practice in
pairs


Checks


Hangs poster on
Models



Has sts to answer them
Checks


Consolidates
Give homework


Listen to teacher then
answer the questions
Read aloud


Gives the result


Answer the questions
Read aloud


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 16th


Period : 48 Unit 8: PLACES
<b> Lesson 4 : B1,5 (p.83, 85)</b>
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss ask for and give about the price of something .</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for and give about </b>


the price of something.


<b>SKILL : listening ,speaking, writing </b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


5’ <b>*- Warm up</b>


Net works
stamp


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

6’


5’


8’
8’


<b>I./ - Pre- listening </b>
1. Pre- Teach vocabulary
- (to) send = mail : gởi thư
- (to) cost : trả giá


- a change : tiền thừa
- altogether : tổng cộng
- an envelope : bao thư
- to receive : nhận
Check : what and where



*<i>Set he scene: </i>


1. What's this ?


2. Where can I post it to my friend ?
3. How can I post it ?


4. How much do you pay in Viet Nam ?
<i>2</i><b>./ True or False prediction</b>


1. Liz'd like to send a letter to Great Britain


F


2. She needs some envelopes T


3. They are 25.00 dong F


4. The stamps for her letter cost 800 dong F


5. The envelopes and the stamps are 11.500
dong T


<b>II./- While listening </b>


<b>1. Listen and check the prediction</b>
<b>Keys :</b>


<b>1- F , 2 – T , 3 – F , 4 – F, 5 – T</b>
<b>2. Answer the questions</b>



a. Where will Liz mail her letter ?


to USA


b. How much does Liz pay altogether ?


11.500 dong


c. How much change does she receive ?


Hangs poster on and
asks sts to match
Checks


Teaches new words
Calls some sts to repeat
Checks


Checks by play games


Uses a letter to elicit to
new lesson


Asks some questions


Runs through
Has sts to predict
Gets feedback



Opens tape


Calls out the answers
Checks


Runs through


Calls out the answers
Corrects mistakes


Thinks and match
Give result


Read all words
Read aloud


Do what teacher asked
Listen and slap


Answer some questions


Listen and guess
Give


Listen and give the
result


Listen to teacher then
answer the questions
Read aloud



send mail


cost change


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

10’


3’


3500 dong


d. Where is your nearest post office ?


In Cang long Market


e. How do you get there from your home?


By bike


<b>III- Post - listening </b>
<i>*<b>Dicussion:</b></i>


- Do you usually send a letter a to your
friends ?


- Where can you buy some stamps and
envelopes ?


- What can you buy at the post office ?
- How much is it to mail aletter in VN ?


<b>*- Home work</b>


Learn by heart new words .Write these
exercises in their notebooks


Models


Calls two pairs to
practice first


Asks sts to practice in
pairs


Checks
Consolidates
Give homework


Gives the result


Answer the questions
Read aloud


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 17th <b><sub>Unit 8: PLACES</sub></b>


<b> Period : 49 Lesson 5 : B2-4 (p.83, 85)</b>



Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss listen and repeat the dialogue then answer some questions, make a </b>
new dialogue from the words given, listen for detail then give the price of each five
items .


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen and repeat the </b>
dialogue then answer some questions, make a new dialogue from the words given
and listen for detail then give the price of each five items .


SKILL : listening, speaking, writing


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

5’
3’
5’
7’
5’
5’


<b>I ./ Pre </b>


<b>1. Pre –teach vocabulary </b>
- a local stamp : tem trong nước
- overseas stamp : tem gởi nước ngoài
- regularly (a ) thường xuyên


- a phone card : thẻ điên thoại
*Checking : R & R



<b>* Set the scene : Hoa and her friend is </b>
<b>going to the post office after the school</b>
<b>* Open prediction </b>


- How many things Hoa buys :……
<b>II./ While </b>


<b>1. Read and check the prediction </b>
<b>Keys :</b>


- Three things


<b>2. Answer the questions :</b>


a. What does Hoa need from the post office ?


- local stamps ,overseas stamps and a phone
card.


b. Why does she need stamps for overseas
mail?


- Because she has a pen pal in America


c. Why does she need a phone card ?


- Because she needs to phone her parents


d. What is Hoa’s pen pal name ?



- His name is Tim


e. How often do they write each other ?


- About once a week


f. Who is Hoa going to the post office with ?


- Nga


<b>3. Complete the dialogue (B 3- page 84)</b>
<b>Keys : </b>


1 – like
2 – are
3 – much
4 – is
5 – Here


<b>* Substitution speaking</b>


<b>a. 2 postcards (4000 dong)/ 5 local stamps</b>
b. a box of writing pad (12000 dong ) – a
phone card ( 100.000 dong )


T elicits & models
T checks pronunciation,
meaning, kinds of
words, stress.



T checks again by ROR.
T sets the scene.


Elicits to new lesson
Has sts to guess the
thing Hoa buys
Read and checks the
prediction


Runs through


Has sts to answer the
questions


Gets feedback


Checks


Elicits to new lesson
Has sts to complete the
dialogue


Has sts read the result
Runs through


Gives the key words
Calls out the new
dialogue


Listen and correct


dialogue


Ss guess & model
Ss repeat chorally and
individually.


Ss copy


Guess


Answer some questions
Give the results


Read aloud


Write down


Read all words
Read aloud


Do what teacher asked
Listen and then replace
words and make new
dialogues


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

5’


5’


4’



1’


c. a packet of envelope ( 7000 dong ) / 4 post
cards ( 2000 dong )


a.Example:


<b>Hoa : I would like two postcards</b>
<b>Clerk : Here you are. Is that all ?</b>


<b>Hoa : I also need five local stamps . How </b>
much is that altogether ?


<b>Clerk : That is twelve thousand dong </b>
<b>Hoa : Here is fifteen thousand dong </b>
<b>Clerk : Thanks . Here’s your change. </b>
<b>4. Listen and check the answers </b>
- a packet of envelopes


- a pen


- a writing pad
- 5 stamps
- a phone card


<i>*. </i><b>Giving the prices of things ;</b>


1. a packet of envelopes : 2.000 dong
2. a pen : 1.500 dong


3. writing pad : 3.000 dong
4. 5 stamps : 2.500 dong
5. a phone card : 50.000 dong
6. What is the total cost ?


- It costs 59000 dong


7. How much change will Mrs Robinson have
from 60.000 dong ?


-She will have 1000dongs in change
* Tape sprit :


Mrs. Robinson goes to a stationary store
and buys a packet of envelopes at 2000 dongs
and a pen at 1500 dong . She also buys a
writing pad at 3000 dong . Then she goes to
the post office and buys 5 stamps at 500 dong
each and 50000 dong phone card . Add up
how much Mrs. Robinson spends altogether.
<b>IV.Post:</b>


<b>*Transformation writing </b>
<b>- Suggested questions </b>


- How often do you go to the post office ?
- What do you want from it ?


- What do you do at the post office ?
- How often do you send letter ? Who ?


*Homework:


Corrects mistakes


Opens tape then checks


Asks sts to give the
prices


Corrects


Has sts to answer the
questions


Gets feedback
Checks


Runs through


Calls out the answers
Corrects mistakes
Consolidates


Listen and check
Give the result


Listen


Give the prices



Answer some questions
Give the results


Read aloud


Write down


Listen and give the
result


Listen to teacher then
answer the questions
Read aloud


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

-Learn the lesson carefully.


-Review Unit 1-3 Gives homework


Week : 17th <b><sub>Unit REVISION</sub></b>


Period : 50 Lesson 1 : Unit 1-2
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss review the knowledge learnt</b>


OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to remember :
+Vocabulary: Units ( 1,2 )



<b> +Grammar : Comparative, Simple Future Tense , Greeting </b>
<b>SKILL : speaking, writing </b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


8’ <b>*- Warmer</b><i>Matching questions with answers</i>
<i>Questions Answers </i>
1. How far is it from a. 10'
your house to school?


Checks attendances
Has sts to match the
questions with the
answers


Report
Match


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

10’


12’


12’


2. How do you go to b. about
500ms


school ?



3. How long does it take c. 3500dong
you to go to school ?


4. How much does this d. by bike
pen cost


<b>I./ Further Practice</b>


<i>1. Fill in the blank with some words </i>
<i><b>uncle, bad, far, live/ glad, meet</b></i>
1. I am ... to meet you
2. Nice to ... you


3. I ... at 12 Nguyen Hue st


4. LAn is staying with her ... on a farm
5. How ... is it from your house to
school ?


<i>2. Write the correct form of words</i>
1. Nam is the ( tall ) student in my class.
- tallest


2. Hoa has ( many) books in English than Lan
- more


3. There (be) some orange juice in the glass.
- are


4. Mai (do) her home work at the moment.


- is doing


5. What you (do) at recess tomorrow ?
- will you do


6. I (borrow ) some books in the school
library next week.


- will borrow
<b>II./ Production </b>


<i>* Make the questions for the underlined </i>
<i>words</i>


1. His telephone number is 8220963
- What is his telephone number
2. My birthday is on June 8th<sub> .</sub>


- When is your birthday ?


3. He will 14 years old on his next birthday.
- How old will he be on his next birthday ?
4. My address is at 12 Quang Trung street
- What is your address?


5. Ba is calling to Ba now.
- Who is calling to ba now ?


Gets feedback



Has sts to work in pairs
to complete the


sentences


Calls out the result
Corrects mistakes
Runs through the words
Asks sts to complete the
sentences with the
correct form of words
given


Checks


Models


Asks sts to make
questions in pairs


Calls out the questions
Checks mistakes


Work in pairs
Give the result
Write


Listen


Work in groups 4 to do


exercise


Gives result


Observer


Work in groups


Give the result


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

3’


6. I go to school six days a week
- How often do you go to school ?


- How many days a week do you go to school
?


7. It's about 100 meters from my house to
school.


- How far is it from your house to school ?
<b>*- Homework</b>


- Review the present progressive tense and
Exclamation sentences.


Consolidates


Gives homework Write down



Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 17th <b><sub>Unit REVISION</sub></b>


<b> Lesson 2 : Unit 3-4</b>
Period : 51


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss review the knowledge learnt to prepare for the first term exam. </b>
<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to remember: </b>
<b> + Vocabulary: Units ( 3,4)</b>


+Grammar : Comparative, Exclamation sentences , There is/are ., Prepositions of
position .


<b>SKILL : speaking, writing </b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


8’ <i><b>*Warm up:</b></i>
+Brainstorming


Near


Checks attendances


Has sts to match the
questions with the
answers


Report
Match


Read all sentences


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

10’


12’


12’


Next to


Behind
<b>I./ Revision </b>


<b>1. Exclamation sentences </b>
<b>Form :</b>


What + a/an + Adj + noun !
Ex:


- What a beautiful hat !
- What an expensive hat !
<b>2. There is / are....</b>
<b>Form :</b>



There is /are + a/an/some + noun ...
Ex:


- There is a table in the living room.
- There are some apples on the table
<b>II./ Further Practice </b>


<i><b>1. Change the sentences into the </b></i>
<i><b>exclamation sentences </b></i>


a. The room is very bright.
- ...
b. The party is very great.
- ...
c. The dinner is very delicous .
- ...
d. The movie is very interesting .
- ...
e. The restaurant is very awful.
- ...
f. The bathroom is very dirty.
- ...


<i><b>2.Describle the pictures with there is/ are...</b></i>


Gets feedback


Has sts to work in pairs
to complete the



sentences


Calls out the result
Corrects mistakes
Runs through the words
Asks sts to complete the
sentences with the
correct form of words
given


Checks


Models


Asks sts to make
questions in pairs


Calls out the questions
Checks mistakes


Work in pairs
Give the result
Write


Listen


Work in groups 4 to do
exercise



Gives result


Observer


Work in groups


Give the result


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

3’


A B C
Ex :


1. There are four people in the picture A
2. There is a table in the picture A
3. ...


<i><b>* Homework </b></i>
- Rewiew units 5,6


Consolidates
Gives homework


Write down


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 18th <b><sub>Unit REVISION</sub></b>



<b> Period : 52 Lesson 3 : Unit 5-6</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss review the knowledge learnt to prepare for the first term exam. </b>
<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to remember: </b>


<b>+ Vocabulary: Units ( 5,6)</b>


<b>+Grammar : Present Progressive Tense , Modal verbs in suggestion and </b>
invitation. Adverbs of frequency.


SKILL : speaking, writing


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


5’ <b>* Warmer </b>


<b>Brainstorming</b>


Checks attendances
Has sts to list out the
activities then match to


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

8’


7’



Play games
Watch TV


Listen to music
<b>I ./ </b>


<b> Presentation</b>


<b>1. Present Progressive Tense</b>
<b>* Forms : </b>


<b>1. </b><i><b>Affirmative</b><b> </b></i>


S + am/is/are + V_ing + O
<b>Ex: </b>


a. He is listening to music


b. They are watching TV in the living room
<b>Usage : Expressing an action or a thing is </b>
happening .


<b>Meaning : đang </b>


<b>Notes : This tense is followed with some </b>
adverbs such as : now , right now ,at the
moment ,..


<i><b>2. Negative </b></i>



S + am/is/are + not + V_ing + O
<b>Ex: </b>


a. He isn’t listening to music.


b. They aren’t watching TV in the living room.
<i><b>3. Interrogative</b></i>


Am/is/ are + S + V_ing + O ?
<i>* With “Wh_” question words </i>


- What/ Where/ When + be + S + V_ing ?
Ex :


a. Is he listening to music ?
b. What is he doing ?


c. Where are they watching TV ?
<b>* Exercise </b>


- <i>Complete the sentences in present progressive</i>
<i>tense.</i>


a. Nam ………..English at school. ( study )
b. We ………..some experiments at school.(do)
c. Girls …………rope in the school yard.( skip)
d. Hoa and Mai………books in the library.
(read)


e. My brother …………a soccer math at the



the network
Gets feedback
Asks sts read


Presents the new
structure


Concept checks


Asks sts read


Give some examples


Gives some exercises
for sts practice


Runs through and
models


Checks results


Lists and Match
Listen


Read all words


Listen to teacher
Observer



Give examples


Read and write


Work in pairs
Give the result
Write


Listen


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

5’


5’


7’


moment. ( watch)


f. She……..to Hue by plane now.( travel)
<b>2. Modal verbs in suggestions and invitations</b>
<i><b>*. Invitation </b></i>


<i><b>Form</b></i> :


- Let’s + bare – infinitive
- Why don’t we/you + V ..?
Ex :


a. Let’s go to my house.
- All right



b. Why don’t we buy some drinks ?
- Yes, let’s


<i><b>*. Suggestion :</b></i> would like


- Would + S + like +N/ to- infinitive ?
Ex:


a. Would you like some apples ?
- Yes, please .


b. Would you like to drink water ?
- No, thanks. I’m not thirsty.
<b>3. Adverbs of frequency </b>


* Adverbs : <i>always, usually , often, sometimes,</i>
<i>seldom, rarely , never</i>.


Form :


- S + adv + V + O ….
- S + be + adv + O…
Ex :


a. I often go to school by bike.
b. They are never late for school.
c. My brother always gets up early.
<b>II. Practice : </b>



<i><b>1. Complete the sentences with the words </b></i>
<i><b>given in correct form</b></i>.


a. Lan never……how to play guitar.
( to learn )


b. Let’s ……to my house for some drink.
( to come )


c. Nam ……..film in the living room now.
( to watch )


d. Why don’t we ……..homework in my house.
( to do )


e. They …….English in the classroom.
( to study )


f. Mr. Nam ………newspaper with his son.


Presents modal verbs in
uses


Concept checks


Gives examples


Has sts give some
examples



Presents the adverbs of
frequency


Give example to model


Runs through the
exercises


Asks sts to work in pairs
to practice


Models
Checks


Has sts to work in
groups


Observer
Listen and read


Write down


Give some examples
following the structures


Listen and give some
adverbs learnt


Read
Write



Work in pairs to do
exercise


Gives result


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

6’


2’


( to read )


2. <i><b>Put the words given into the suitable place</b></i>.
a. Mai is late for school. ( sometimes )


b. Lan rehearses a play with her friends. (often )
c. They are traveling to Ha Long Bay. ( now )
d. Hoa like to sing a song with Nam. ( would )
e. He gets up early in the morning. ( seldom )
f. Why you buy some stamps for me ? ( don’t)


<b>* Homework </b>


- Learn by heart the lesson
- Review Units ( 7 -8 )


Checks by call some sts
to read aloud the



answers
Corrects


Consolidates
Gives homework


Work in groups
Give the result


Listen


Write down Listen and
prepare at home


Week : 18th <b><sub>Unit REVISION</sub></b>


<b> Lesson 4 : Unit 7-8</b>
Period : 53


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss review the knowledge learnt to prepare for the first term exam. </b>
<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to remember: </b>


<b>+Vocabulary: Units ( 7-8)</b>


<b>+Grammar : Comparisons , How far /much …? , Prepositions of position. </b>
SKILL : speaking, writing



<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


5’ <b>* Warmer </b>


<b>Brainstorming</b>


between
opposite


Checks attendances
Has sts to list out the
activities then match to
the network


Gets feedback
Asks sts read


Report


Lists and Match
Listen


Read all words


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

7’


7’


5’



10’


next to
I. Presentation


<b> </b>


<b> 1. Comparisons</b>


<b>a. Comparative with short Adj /Adv</b>
<b>Form : </b>


S + V + Adj/Adv_ er + Noun /Pronoun
Ex :


a. My dog is smarter than yours.
b. Nam run faster than I .


<b>b. With long Adj/Adv</b>
<b>Form : </b>


S + V + more + Adv/Adj + than + N /
PrN


Ex :


a. Lan is more inteligent than her sister
b. Lan writes more carefully than Nam.
<b>2. Comparison of </b><i><b>much/many ,a little/little </b></i>


<i><b>and a few/few</b></i>


<b>a. much/ many  more </b>
<b>Ex :</b>


- T take more coffee than she does
- I have more homework than Nam
<b>b. little / little  less </b>


<b>Ex : </b>


- There is less coffee in my cup than in yours.
- She has less sugar than I


<b>c. a few / few  fewer </b>
<b>Ex :</b>


- I have fewer friends than my brother.
- Hai has fewer days off than Mr. Ba.
3. How much / far ……?


<b>Form : </b>


How + adj +be + S…. ?
Ex :


a. How much is this book ?
- It’s 5000 Viet Nam dong.


b. How far is it from your house to school ?


- It’s about 6 kilometers.


<b>II./ Practice </b>


<i><b>1. Complete the sentences using </b></i>
<i><b>comparative form of the words</b>. </i>
a. I run………..( fast ) than Nam.


Presents the new
structure


Concept checks


Asks sts read


Give some examples


Presents others adverbs
in comparison


Concept checks


Gives examples
Has sts give some
examples


Presents the stucture
Gives example and
models



Runs through the
exercises


Listen to teacher
Observer


Give examples


Read and write


Observer
Listen and read
Write down


Give some examples
following the structures


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

7’


4’


b. This chair is ……..(comfortable) than that
chair.


c. The Nile is ………..(long) than Me Kong
River.


d. Nam’s house is ……….(beautiful ) than
Nga’s house.



e. My father has……..( a few ) hours
working than my mother.


f. March has………( many ) days than
February.


<i><b>2. Fill in the sentences the suitable words</b></i>
a. Tuan has ……..stamps than Hoa in my
class.


b. How……..is that hat ? – Two thousand
dong.


c. My house is ……….the restaurant and the
hotel.


d. This box is ……….milk than that one.
e. Mr. Nam is ……….intelligent than his
brother.


f. ………do you pay for traveling by
bus.


<b>* Homework </b>


- Learn by heart the lesson.


- Review all lesson to prepare for the first
exam.



Asks sts to work in pairs
to practice


Models
Checks


Has sts to work in
groups


Checks by call some sts
to read aloud the


answers
Corrects
Consolidates
Gives homework


Gives result


Observer


Work in groups
Give the result


Listen


Write down Listen and
prepare at home


Week : 18th <b><sub>Unit REVISION</sub></b>



Period : 54 Lesson 5 : Shelf-Test
Date of preparation :


Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss do the test by themselves.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know how to do the test </b>
and remember what they have studied..


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

<b>I / LISTEN : (2 pts)</b>


<i><b>* Listen to the tape, then fill in the gaps :</b></i>


a. In Literature, we learn about _______ and write ___________ .
b. In _______, we study past and present__________ in Viet Nam and
arround the world.


c. In Geography, we study different ________ and their __________ .
d. In the _________ class, we study _______ .


<b>III /GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY : (3pts)</b>


 <i><b>Choose the best option a, b, c, or d to complete the following sentences:</b></i>
1. English books are ___ the back ___ the library.


a. on – of b. at – of c. of – at d. in – to
2. In The USA, students ________ a school uniform.



a. do not wear b. are not wear c. is not wearing d. are not wearing
3. Would you like ________to the movie tomorrow ?


a. going b. to going c. go d. to go


4. Peter is a very good boy. He ______ tidies his room and helps his mother.
a. never b. sometimes c. rarely d. often


5. Why don’t we study soccer ?


a. I love to b. I’m sorry, I can’t c.OK, I’m sorry d.I’m sorry, I can
6. Which _______do you like best ? _ English.


a. subject b. ruler c.eraser d. pencil
7. Let’s go to the ______and get a cold drink


a. school b.board c. cafeteria d.beach
8. We enjoy different activities _______ school hours.


a. between b.on c. with d.after
9. Ba is the ______of the stamp collector’s club


a. president b. student c. teacher d. doctor
10. What_____ your sister’s favorite subject ?


a. do b. does c.is d.are


11. _____ going to the concert ?


a. Why don’t you b.What about c.Let’s d.Would you like


12.8.45 is said :


a.It’s forty-five to eight b.It’s eight past forty-five
c.It’s eight forty-five d.It’s forty-five eight
13.Nam’s school is ………. than your school.


a.the biggest b. biggest c. bigger d. big
14.What………..test !


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

15. The longest vacation in a year in Vietnam is………


a. summer holiday b. Tet holiday c. Independence day d. Christmas
16. I usually………. to Dalat on vacation.


a. goes b. going c. to go d. go
17. They are………marbles now.


a. play b. playing c. to play d. plays
18. Students in Vietnam go to school………days a week.
a. four b. five c. seven d. six


19. Let’s……….to music.


a. listens b. to listen c. listen d.listening
20. How ……….. is it from your house to school ?


a. long b. often c. much d. far
21. Would you like ………..movies ?


a. watch b. watches c. watching d. to watch


22. The bookstore is ……… the bank and the police station.


a. on b. in c. among d. between
<b>II / READING : (2.5pts)</b>


 <i><b>Read the passage carefully, then check True (T) or False (F) :</b></i>


Children in Viet Nam go to school when they are six years old. From 6 to
7 they are in primary schools. In primary schools they learn how to show
problems. They have maths, Vietnamese and literature. They learn to draw,
sing, dance and speak English, too.


From 11 to 17 boy and girls in Viet Nam go to secondary schools. There
they have a lot of subjects. They learn to study by themselves.


In Viet Nam children do not go to school on Sundays. They like to school
all day. They love to have lunch with their friends. Sometimes they go on a
picnic with their teachers. Each day at school is a happy day for them.


1. There are classes from Monday to Saturday. ____
2. Children start school at the age of six. ____
3. They don’t like to have lunch with their friends . ____
4. They aren’t happy when they stay at school all day. ____


 <i><b>Reread the passage again, then anwer the questions below:</b></i>
1. Where do they have lunch ?


………
2. How old do children go to school?



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

………


<b>III / WRITING : (2.5 pts)</b>


 <i><b>Complete the following sentences, using provided words.</b></i>
1. Ba / learning / play / guitar / in / music room


………
2. Her group / rehears / play / for / school anniversary celebration


………
3. Hoa / learn / how / use / computer / her / computer / class


………
4. What / you / usually / do / after /school/?


...
5. I / never / go / the / cafeteria / lunchtime


………
Week : 19th


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>PHÒNG GD VÀ ĐT CÀNG LONG THE FIRST TERM EXAMINATION</b>
<b>TRƯỜNG THCS AN TRƯỜNG C ENGLISH 7 – TIME ALLOTTED : 45’</b>


NAME



……….
CLASS 7


Teacher’s remark :


<b> I/LISTENING:</b>


NAME JOB AGE PLACE OF WORK


Mai A student <i><b>(1)</b></i> A high school


Mr John <i><b>(2)</b></i> 29 A hospital


Mrs Lan A journalist 30 <i><b>(5)</b></i>


Mr Phong <i><b>(3)</b></i> <i><b>(4)</b></i> A factory


1. ……… 2. ………. 3. ……… 4………….
5………..


<b> II/ QUESTION 1: GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY (5ms)</b>
 <i><b>Choose the best option to complete each sentence</b></i> :


1. Nam’s school is ………. than your school.


a.the biggest b. biggest c. bigger d. big
2.What………..test !


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

3. The longest vacation in a year in Vietnam is……….


a. summer holiday b. Tet holiday c. Independence day d.
Christmas


4. I usually………. to Dalat on vacation.


a. goes b. going c. to go d. go
5. They are………marbles now.


a. play b. playing c. to play d. plays
6. Students in Vietnam go to school………days a week.
a. four b. five c. seven d. six
7. Let’s……….to music.


a. listens b. to listen c. listen d.listening
8. How ……….. is it from your house to school ?


a. long b. often c. much d. far
9. Would you like ………..movies ?


a. watch b. watches c. watching d. to watch
10. The bookstore is ……… the bank and the police station.
a. on b. in c. among d. between


III/ QUESTION 2 : READING


 <i><b>Read the passage and do the exercises :</b></i>


My name is John . I’m from the North of England , but I’m working in
Vietnam. I’m a journalist and I often finish work at 12 p.m .In my free time, I
enjoy painting and reading . My wife is Susan . She works in a hospital . She is


studying Vietnamese


at a language center . I only meet her at weekends.
<i>1.</i> <i><b>Write (T) for True or (F) for False : (1m</b>)<b> </b></i>


<i>a.</i> John is a journalist ………….
<i>b.</i> He doesn’t like reading in his free time. ………….
<i>c.</i> His wife works in a bank. …………
<i>d.</i> She is studying Vietnamese. …………..
<i><b>2. Answer the questions : (1,5ms)</b></i>


<i>a.</i> Where is John from ?


………
<i>b.</i> What time does he finish his work ?


………..
<i>c.</i> What is his wife’s name ?


………
IV/ QUESTION 3 : WRITING (2,5ms)


 <i><b>Write the sentences completely :</b></i>
1. Would / like/go/ cafeteria/ ?


………...
2. How far/ from/ house/ market/ ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

………
4. He/ sometimes/ get/ 6 o’clock.



………
5. How often/she/movie/?


………
The end


<b>CORRECTION</b>
ANSWER KEY


I/LISTENING:


NAME JOB AGE PLACE OF WORK


Mai A student <i><b>16(0,5)</b></i> A high school


Mr John <i><b>A doctor(0,5)</b></i> 29 A hospital


Mrs Lan A journalist 30 <i><b>A magazine(0,5)</b></i>


Mr Phong <i><b>A worker(0,5)</b></i> <i><b>45(0,5)</b></i> A factory


<b>II/ VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR:</b>


1.c(0,25) 2.a(0,25) 3.a(0,25) 4.d(0,25)
5.b(0,25)


6.d(0,25) 7.c(0,25) 8.d(0,25) 9.d(0,25)


10.d (0,25)


<b>III/READING:</b>


1./ a.T (0,25) b.F(0,25) c. F(0,25) d. T(0,25)
2./ a.John is from the North of England.(0,5)


b.He finishes his work at 12 p.m .(0,5)
c.His wife’s name is Susan .(0,5)
<b> IV/ WRITING:</b>


1./ Would you like to go to the cafeteria ?(0,5)
2./ How far is it from your house to the market ?(0,5)
3./ They are playing catch in the yard .(0,5)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

<i><b>LISTENING PART</b></i> :


Mai is a student. She is 16 years old. She studies at a high school.
Mr John is 29. He is a doctor. He works in a hospital.


Mrs Lan is a journalist. She is 30 years old. She writes for a magazine.
Mr phong is 45. He is a worker. He works in a factory.




The end


Week : 20th <b><sub>Unit 9: AT HOME AND AWAY</sub></b>


<b> Period : 55 Lesson 1 : A1(p.86- 87)</b>



Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss .practice the simple past tense .</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice the simple past </b>
tense


SKILL : listening, speaking, writing


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters.</b>
PROCEDUCE:


4’


6’


<b>*- Warm up</b>


<i>- Chatting ( Pictures page 86 ) </i>
1. Where is it ? Do you go there ?
2. How does it look like ?


3. What do you do when go there ?
4. What do you think of it ?


<b>I. /- Presentation</b>


<b>1. Pre_ Teach vocabulary:</b>



- a gift = pr<i><b>e</b></i>sent : món quà (example)
- an aqu<i><b>a</b></i>rium : bể cá, hồ cá(situation)
- a trip : hành trình(translation)
- (to) be - was/ were


- (to) have - had
- (to) take - took
- (to) buy - bought
- (to) go - went


Checks attendances
Asks sts some questions


Teaches new words
following steps for
presenting vocabulary.
Has sts repeat all words


Report


Listen and answer the
questions following the
picture


Listen and repeat after
Teacher


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

4’



8’


7’


* Check : Rub out and Remember
2. Presentation the simple past tense.
<b>*Set the scene</b>


- Rub out and Remember Dialogue


Ba Liz


Ba : How <i>was</i> your vacationin Nha Trang ?
Liz :It <i>was </i>wonderful


Ba : What places <i>did</i> you visit ?
Liz :I <i>visited </i>Tri Nguyen Aquarium


Ba : <i>Did</i> you buy some <i>souvenirs</i> in Nha
Trang ?


Liz :Yes, I <i>did</i>
<i>* Concept check :</i>
<i><b>a. Affirmative </b></i>
<i>- Form :</i>


S + V2/ed + O


<i>- Usage : To expression an action happed in </i>
<i>the past </i>



<i>- Adverbs in tense : <b>yesterday , last week , </b></i>
<i><b>last month , last year , ago. </b></i>


Ex :


a. Liz visited Cham Temple.
b. She was tired after the trip.
<i><b>b. Negative</b></i>


<i>- Form : </i>


<i> S + (was/were)+ not / didn’t V+ O</i>
<i>-Ex <b>:</b></i>


a. Liz didn’t visit Cham Temple.
b. She wasn’t tired after the trip.
<i><b>c. Interrogative</b></i>


Form :


-Was / Were + S + O ?
- Did + S + V + O ?
Ex:


a. Did she visit Cham Temple ?
- Yes, She did.


b. Was she tired after the trip ?
- No, she wasn’t.



<i><b>II./</b></i><b>- Practice </b>


1. <i><b>Make the sentences in the simple past </b></i>


Asks sts listen the
dialogue then repeat in
pairs


Calls some pair speaking


Concept checks


Checks form, usage and
meaning


Runs through
Has sts to make the
sentences


Models


Do what teacher asked
Listen


Listen
Speak


Observer



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

7’


7’


2’


<i><b>tense.</b></i>


a. She / visit/ Tri Nguyen Aquarium / week
- She visited TRi Nguyen Aquarium last
week.


b. They/ travel / Nha Trang / bus
c. Liz / buy/souvenirs/ friends.
d. People/ Ha Noi / be/ friendly
e. Ba / return / Ha Noi/ bus.


f. Mr. Robinson / buy / some gifts.
2. <i><b>Answer the questions</b></i>.


a. How was Liz’s vacation in Nha Trang ?
b. Did she think the food was delicious ?
c. Did she visit an aquarium ?


d. Was she tired after the trip ?
e. Where did she visit ?


f. Was Nha Trang beautiful ?
III. /- Production



<i>Discussion</i>


1. Where did you on your vacation ?
2. Who did you go there with ?


3. What did you do when you went there ?
4. What did you think of it ?


- Report :
<b>5/- Home work</b>


- Learn by heart new words, the structure .
- Prepare Lesson 2 – A(2,3)


Checks


Hangs poster on
Runs through


Asks sts to answer the
questions


Checks result
Gives questions
Asks sts to work in
groups to solve the
issues


Checks
Consolidates


Comments


Gives homework


Read aloud
Listen and correct
Observer


Work in pairs to answer
the questions


Gives the result
Work in groups to
answer the questions
Report


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 20th <b><sub>Unit 9: AT HOME AND AWAY</sub></b>


<b> Period : 56 Lesson 2 : A2(p.87- 88)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss read a text about a trip and answer questions </b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read a text about a trip </b>
and answer questions



SKILL : reading, speaking, writing


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
PROCEDUCE:


5’


6’


4’


3’


<b>- Warm up</b>
<i>Pelmanism</i>


go buy have talk talk


talked went had bought took
<b>I/ Pre - Reading </b>


<i>1. Pre - teach vocabulary </i>
- a shark : cá mập (situation)
- a d<i><b>o</b></i>lphin : cá heo(situation)
- a t<i><b>u</b></i>rtle : rùa biển(explanation)
- a crab : cua biển(realia)


- a cap :mũ lưỡi trai(picture)
- an <i><b>e</b></i>xit : lối thoát (example)


* Check : what and where


+ Infinitive Past tense
Eat ate


See saw
Wear wore
Think thought
<i>2.Set the scene:</i>


Liz and her parents were at the Tri Nguyen
aquarium. What did they do there?


<i>3/True / false statements predictions:</i>
a/The Robinsons went to Tri Nguyen
aquarium.


b/They saw many types of fish.
c/Liz bought a little turtle.


Checks attendances
Asks sts guess the pairs
of posters


Teaches new words
following steps for
presenting vocabulary.
Has sts repeat all words
Checks



Report
Play game


Guess the pairs of poster
Listen and repeat after
Teacher


Read all words
Read aloud


Do what teacher asked
Listen


Write down


Predict T/F?


Dolphin crab


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

5’
10’


10’


2’


d/They had lunch at a food stall.
e/ Liz ate fish and crab.


II./ While – Reading :



<b>1/ Check True/false prediction:</b>
a.T b.T c.F d.T e.F
<b>2. Answer the questions </b>
<b>Keys : </b>


a. Her parents


b. They saw sharks, dolphin , turtles and
many types of fish.


c. They bought a cap and a poster.


d. Yes, she did. “ Liz wore the cap all day”.
e. Yes, they do. “ Mr. and Mrs. Robinson ate
fish and crab”


f. Because remembered the beautiful fish in
the aquarium”.


<b>III/Post-Reading:</b>


<b>- Match the pictures with the sentences </b>
a 1. They ate lunch at the food stall
b. 2. The Robinsons went to Tri
Nguyen c.
Aquarium


d. 3. They saw many types of fish
e. 4. They went to souvenir shop.


5. He bought for Liz a cap and a
poster at the souvenir shop.
* Keys : a – 2, b – 3 , c – 4 , d – 5 , e – 1
<b>* Home work</b>


- Learn by heart new words .
- Prepare Lesson 3 A (3,4 )


Asks sts read the test
then answer the
questions


Calls some pair speaking
Correct mistakes


Runs through


Has sts to match the
sentences with the
pictures


Checks


Consolidates
Comments
Gives homework


Read and answer True
and false



Display


Read


Answer the questions
Observer


Work in pairs to match
the pictures with the
sentences


Listen and correct
Gives the result


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 20th <b><sub>Unit 9: AT HOME AND AWAY</sub></b>


<b> Period : 57 Lesson 3 : A3-4(p.89- 90)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

<b>AIM:To help ss read a test then correct the sentences and listen to the story for </b>
odering.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read a test then correct </b>
the sentences and listen to the story for odering.


SKILL : reading, speaking, listening and writing.



<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
PROCEDUCE:


5’


7’


3’
3’


<b>* Warm up</b>
<i>Net works</i>


looked


bought


( arrive, help, remember , rent , be , eat , have
, give , talk , return , go , see , play , teach ,
think , look , buy )


<b>I./ Pre- reading </b>


<b>1. Pre – Teach Vocabulary</b>


- (to) keep in touch : giữ liên lạc(translation)
- (to) rent - rented : thuê(Explanation)


- (to) improve - improved : cải
thiện(translation)



- (to) teach - taught : dạy(situation)
- (to) come - came : đến(situation)
- (to) move – moved(action)
- (to) receive – received(situation)
* <i>Check</i> : rub out and remember
* <i>Set the scene </i>


- What is it ?


- What does it talk about ?
2<i><b>. </b></i><b>Ordering prediction </b>


__a. Liz help Ba with stamp collection.
__b. The Robinson came to Viet Nam this
year.


__c. Liz will bring Ba some more stamps.


Checks attendances
Models


Asks sts to match
Checks


Gets feedback


Elicits to new lesson
Teaches new words
following steps for


presenting new words


Checks


Presents new lesson
Hangs poster on
Runs through
Feedback


Has sts read and checks


Report
Observer


Match the words to the
network


Listen


Listen and repeat after
teacher


Write
Rewrite
Listen
Predic
Regular


verb



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

7’
6’


12’


2’


__d. The Robinsons moved to a new
apartment .


__e. Ba taught Liz Vietnamese .
II./ While - reading


1. <i><b>Read and check prediction</b></i>.
Keys : b – d – e – a – c
<i>2. <b>Make these sentences true</b></i>
a. Liz lived a long way from Ba
( next door to )


b. Liz learned Vietnamese in the USA
( in Viet Nam )


c. Liz collects stamps
( Ba )


d. Liz 's aunt lives in Vietnam
( New York )


e. The Robinsons moved to HCM city
( the other side of Ha Noi )



f. The Robinsons moved . Now Ba is happy
( sad )


g. Ba is never going to see Liz again
( will see Liz next week )


III./ Post Reading
<i>- Summary the text </i>


<i>- Listen to the test then check the sentences </i>
<i>heard.</i>


<i>*Tape sprits : </i>


The Robinsons had a great holiday in
Nha Trang . Unfortunately, the holiday soon
ended and it was time to return home. They
took a bus back to Ha Noi . Liz was excited
as the bus through the countryside. She saw
rice paddies for the first time. Everything
looked calm and peaceful. At four o’clock ,
the bus stopped at a small roadside restaurant
for 10 minutes . Mr. Robinson was asleep , so
Mrs. Robinson bought some peanuts and an
ice cream for Liz. The bus arrived in Ha Noi
at about 7 pm .


* Keys : b , d , e , h , j



<b>* - Home work</b>


Checks result


Asks sts read again and
then correct the


statements


Checks and correct


Has sts to summarize the
text


Calls some read aloud


Hangs poster on
Runs through


Asks sts to listen to the
tape then check the
sentences


Checks result


Consolidates
Gives homework


Read and check



Correct the sentences


Write down


Do what teacher asked
Read aloud


Listen to the tape
Checks the sentences


Call out the answers


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

- Learn by heart new words .Write these
exercises in their notebooks


- Prepare Lesson 4 B ( 1,2)


Week : 21st <b><sub>Unit 9: AT HOME AND AWAY</sub></b>


<b> Period : 58 Lesson 4 : B1-2(p.92- 93)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss practice a dialogue and practice Yes/No questions. </b>


OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice a dialogue and
practice Yes/No questions.



SKILL : reading, speaking, listening and writing.


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
PROCEDUCE:


4’


6’


<b>* Warm up</b>
<i>Pelmanisn</i>


go take have see buy watch


took watched bought saw went had
<b>I./ Presentation</b>


1. Pre_ Teach Vocabulary.
- a hairdresser : thợ cắt tóc


Checks attendances


Hangs poster on the
board


Has sts guessing the
pairs of words


Report


Play games


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

4’


10’


7’


10’


2’


- a dressmaker : thở may
- a neighbor : người hàng xóm
- a material : vải , vật liệu
- clever (a) : khéo léo
* Check : what and where


2. Presentation Yes/ No questions :
<b>* Listen and Repeat Dialogue </b>
<b>( B 1- page 92 )</b>


<b>* Concept check </b>
<b>- Form :</b>




-Usage : Guessing the things true or false
<b>II./ - Practice </b>



<b>1. Answer the questions : </b>
<b>Keys : </b>


a. Hoa’s aunt is a hairdresser.
b. She is a dressmaker.


c. No, she didn’t.
d. No, she didn’t.
e. Yes, she did .
2. Word cues drill.


a. You/ watch TV/ last night / Yes
- Did you watch TV last night
- Yes, I did


b. They / play tennis/ last month/ Yes
c. Hoa/ buy the dress/ No


d. Her aunt / make Hoa's dress/ No
e. Lan / go to school / yesterday / Yes
f. Hoa / meet / Lan / last week/ No
III./ - Production


Change into the negative and interrogative
forms


a. Lan goes to school by bus ?


Teaches new words
following steps for


presenting new words
Checks


Reads words


Presents new structure
Concept checks


Runs through
Asks sts to work in
pairs


Checks results


Give words
Models
Checks results


Hangs poster on the


Write


Play game


Listen and observer
what teacher did


Write
Listen



Work in pairs to
practice the questions


Listen


Works in pairs to ask
and answer


Give results
Observer
Practice


hairdresser dressmaker


material neighbor


Did + S + V0 ...?
-Yes, S + did


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

2’


-Lan doesn't go to school by bus
-Does Lan go to ...?


b. He went to the zoo yesterday
c. I learnt English yesterday
d. They visited me last week
<b>* Home work</b>


- Learn by heart new lesson


- Prepare Lesson 5- B ( 3,4)


board


Runs through
Checks
Comments
Gives homework


Read aloud
Listen


Prepare at home


Week : 21st <b><sub>Unit 9: AT HOME AND AWAY</sub></b>


<b> Period : 59 Lesson 5: B3-4(p.93- 94)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss read for details.</b>


OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand Hoa’s
sewing work.


SKILL : reading, speaking, listening and writing.


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>


PROCEDUCE:


5’


10’


<b>* Warm up</b>


<b>Write the past form of verbs </b>
<b>- eat = </b><i><b> ate</b></i>


<b>- send = </b><i><b>sent</b></i>


<b>- return = </b><i><b>returned</b></i>
<b>- teach = </b><i><b>taught</b></i>
<b>- think = </b><i><b>thought</b></i>
<b>- give = </b><i><b>gave</b></i>
<b>- help = </b><i><b>helped</b></i>
<b>- rent = </b><i><b>rented</b></i>
<b>I./ - Pre - reading </b>


<i><b>1. Pre _ Teach Vocabulary </b></i>


Checks attendances
Hangs poster on the
board


Checks results


Teaches new words



Report


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

3’


5’
10’


10’


- a hobby : sở thích (explanation)


- a sewing machine : máy may(situation)
- a cushion : tấm đệm gối(picture)


- useful (a) : có ích(translation)
- ( to) sew : may(mime)


- ( to ) decide : quyết định(situation)
* Check : Slap the board


* <i>Set the scene </i>
- Who is this ?


- What does she want to do ?
<i><b>2. Ordering statements prediction </b></i>
a. She made a cushion


b. She made a skirt



c. Hoa bought some material
d. She tried it on


f. It fitted well.


g. She learnt how to sew.
<b>II./ While - reading </b>


<i><b>1. Read and Check The Prediction </b></i>
Keys : g – c – a – b – d – f


<i><b>2. Answer the questions Questions</b></i>


a. What did Hos learn to use ? how to use a
sewing machine


b. What did she make first ? a cushion for her
armchair


c. What color was it ? blue and while


d. What did she make next ? a skirt


e. What color was it ?


green with while flowers on it


f. How did it look ? pretty


g. What was the problem ? too big



h. Who helped her ? her neighbor, Mrs. Ma


i. How did it fit finally ? very well


<b>III./ Post - reading </b>


<i><b>* Put the verbs brackets in the simple past</b></i>
<i><b>Keys : </b></i>


1. Hoa watched her neighbor...
2. First, she bought some material
3. Then, she cut the dress out


4. Next, she used a simming machine
5. Hoa decided that sewing was a useful...
6. She made a cushion ... the cushion was fit


following steps for
presenting vocabulary
Checks


Presents new lesson


Gives statements
Asks sts predict the
ordering


Asks sts read and check
the prediction



Checks results
Runs through the
question


Has sts to answer
Checks results and
corrects


Hangs poster on Runs
through


Models


Asks sts to do


Listen and repeat after
teacher


Write
Play game


Listen and answer
Predict the ordering
Give


Read and check
Give results


Work in pairs to answer


the questions


Give results


Listen


Do exercises


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

2’


but her dress wasn't.


7. Then, her neighbor helped her, so finally it
fitted her.


<b>* Home work</b>


- Learn by heart new words .


- Prepare Lesson 6- Language Focus 3


Checks results
Corrects


Comments
Gives homework


Listen write


Listen and prepare at


home


Week : 21st <b><sub>Unit 9: AT HOME AND AWAY</sub></b>


<b> Period : 60 Lesson 6: Language focus(p.95- 98)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss practice the language focus </b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice the language </b>
focus


SKILL : reading, speaking, listening and writing.


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
PROCEDUCE:


6’


7’


* Warm up:
Net work


( borrow , decide ,fit , learn , look , watch ,
buy , cut , make , think , see, be , arrive ,
talk , rent )



* Activity 1


Checks attendances
Asks sts to match the
words to the net
Gets feedback


Runs through


Report


Play game
Listen


Listen and work in
groups 4 to do the


Regula
r
Verbs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

10’


10’


10’


2’



<i>a. Write the past form of verbs in the table</i>
<i>Keys : </i>


bought , helped , remembered , took , sent ,
thought , talked .


<i>b. Complete the sentences with the words in </i>
<i>box</i>


<i>Keys</i> :
a. played
b. talked
c. bought
d. worked
e. sent
* Activity 2


<i>- Complete the dialogue </i>
<i>Keys</i> :


- Every day I clean my room, help my mom
and study English


- I cleaned my room, helped my mom ,
studied English , watched TV , played
volleyball and stayed at Hoa’s house.
- I will study English , clean room , help
mom , see a movie , visit grandmother and
buy new shoes .



* Activity 3


- Write sentences with more, less and fewer
a. Before , there were two tomatoes . Now ,
there are more tomatoes.


b. Before, there were some meat. Now, there
is less meat.


c. Before, there were some bananas. Now,
there are more bananas.


d. ……..
* Activity 4


- Answer the questions about yourself
a. What do you do every day ?


b. What did you do yesterday ?
c. what will you do tomorrow ?
<b>* Homework </b>


Models


Asks sts work in groups
4 to practice the exercise
Checks results


Runs through
Models



Has sts to work in pairs
to complete the dialogue
Checks


Runs through the
pictures


Models


Has sts work in pairs to
write the sentences
Checks and corrects
Give questions
Runs through
Models
Checks
Comments
Gives homework


exercises


Give results


Write


Listen
Observer
Works in pairs
Give



Listen and do
Give results


Listen and write


Answer the questions in
pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

- Practice the structure at home.
- Prepare Unit 10- Lesson 1: A 1


Week : 22nd <b><sub>Unit 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE </sub></b>


<b> Period : 61 Lesson 1: A1,4(p.99,102)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss read a letter and answer questions </b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read a letter and answer </b>
questions .


<b>SKILL : reading, speaking, and writing.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
PROCEDUCE:



6’


6’


<b>* Warm up</b>
<i>Jumbled words</i>
1. tade = date
2. feni =
3. vole =
4. ndse =
5. rede =
6. wetir =
7. ricevee =
<b>I./ - Pre -reading </b>


<i>1. Pre_ Teach Vocabulary</i>
- a h<i><b>a</b></i>rvest : mùa gặt (situation)
- h<i><b>e</b></i>lpful (a): có ích(explanation)
- (to) <i><b>i</b></i>ron : ủi , là(mine)


- (to ) hear : nghe (mine)


- prob<i>a</i>bly (a) : tất nhiên (translation)
* Check : R & R


* Set the scene : Hoa’s parents send her a
letter to talk with her about the family


Checks attendances
Hangs poster on the


board


Checks results
Teaches new words
following steps for
presenting vocabulary
Checks


Presents new lesson


Report


Rewrite words
Listen


Listen and repeat after
teacher


Write
Play game


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

4’


7’
10’


10’


members



2. <i>True or false prediction</i>


1. Hoa's parents are working hard on the
farm for the harvest T


2. They are sick F


3. Hoa's grandmother often works with her
parent so she is help ful F


4. Hoa's mother hopes she is taking care of
herself T


5. Hoa's mother wants her to stay up late


F


6. Hoa's parents will visit her in Ha Noi soon


T


<b>II./ - While Reading </b>
<i><b>1. Checks the predictions </b></i>


<i><b>Keys</b></i> : 1- T , 2 – F , 3 – F , 4 – T , 5 – F , 6 -
T


<i><b>2. Answer the Questions</b></i>


a. Why are Hoa's parents busy ?



Because it is nearly harvest time again


b. Who help them on the farm ?


Hoa's grandfather


c. When will they go to Ha Noi ?


They will go to Ha noi after the harvest


d. How is Hoa different now ?


Gets up early and does morning exercises


e. What does Hoa's mother want her to do ?


Washes and irons her clothes


f. What does she want her not to do ?


Eats too much candy and stays up late


<b>III./- Post - Reading </b>


<b>*Answer the question about yourselves </b>
1. What time do you get up ? go to bed ?
2. Do you take morning exercise ?
3. Do you like eating candy or fruit ?
4. Who often washes and irons your


clothes ?


*Complete Hoa’s reply to her mother with
<b>suitable words:</b>


1. was 5. get 9. eating
2. having 6. go 10. told
3. show/ take 7. wash 11. see
4. take 8. iron 12. go


Gives statements
Asks sts predict


Asks sts read and check
the prediction


Checks results
Runs through the
questions


Has sts to answer
Checks results and
corrects


Hangs poster on Runs
through


Models


Asks sts to do


Checks results
Corrects


Runs through the letter
Has sts to give answer
Checks results and
corrects


Predict statements T/F
Give


Read and check
Give results


Work in pairs to answer
the questions


Give results


Listen


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

2’ <b>* Home work</b>


- Learn by heart new words .
- Read a letter again .


- Prepare Lesson 2 – A ( 2, 3)


Comments
Gives homework



Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 22nd <b><sub>Unit 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE </sub></b>


<b> Period : 62 Lesson 2: A2-3(p.100-101)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss listen and order the activities </b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen and order the </b>
activities


<b>SKILL : listening, speaking, and writing.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


4’


6’


4’


<b>* Warm up</b>



<i>Matching the English words with the </i>
<i>Vietnamese</i>


1. get up a. đi ngủ
2. eat breakfast b. ăn trưa
3. eat lunch c. ăn sáng
4. do home work d. thức dậy
5. go to bed e. làm bài tập
<b>I./ Pre_Listening </b>


<b>1. Pre _ Teach Vocabulary </b>


-((to) brush teeth : đánh răng (mine)
- (to) comb hair : chảy tóc (mine)
- (to) sh<i><b>o</b></i>wer : tắm vòi sen (situation)
- (to) change clothes : thay đổi quần
áo(explanation)


- (to) wash shoes : lau giày (translation)
* <i>Check</i> : what and where


<i>* Set the scene :There are some pictures to </i>
<i>describe Hoa’s yesterday activities .</i>


<i>2. Prediction questions :</i>


Checks attendances
Hangs poster on the
board



Checks results
Teaches new words
following steps for
presenting vocabulary
Checks


Presents new lesson
Gives questions
Asks sts predict


Report


Match words with the
meanings


Listen


Listen and repeat after
teacher


Write
Play game


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

10’


7’


10’


4’



a. What did she did first ?
b. What did she eat at recess ?
c. What did she do last ?<i> </i>
<b>II./ While – Listening</b>


<b>1. Listen and check predictions :</b>
<b>Keys :</b>


a. She got up and took a shower.
b. She ate sandwich.


c. She went to bed at 11 o’clock.
<b>2. Listen and ordering the pictures </b>
Keys :


a , e , f , d , g , c , h , b.
III./ Post - Listening


- Talk about your diaries
Questions :


a. What do you do every day ?


b. What time do you get up / do morning
exercise /eat breakfast / do homework ?


<b>*- Home work</b>


- Learn by heart the lesson .


- Prepare Lesson 3 A ( 4 )


Asks sts to listen and
check the prediction
Checks results
Runs through the
pictures


Checks results and
corrects


Hangs poster of the
questions on


Runs through
Models


Asks sts to do
Checks results
Corrects


Comments
Gives homework


Listen and check
Give results


Work in pairs to order
the pictur



Give results
Listen


Answer the questions
Give results


Listen and prepare at
home


*****************************************************************************
Week : 22nd <b><sub>Unit 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE </sub></b>


<b> Period : 63 Lesson 3: B1(p.103)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss read a dialogue and answer the questions </b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read a dialogue and </b>
answer the questions


<b>SKILL : listening, speaking, and writing.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
PROCEDUCE:


4’ <b>* Warm up</b>



<i>Matching </i>


1. tooth a. đau răng


Checks attendances
Asks sts to match
Listens and corrects


Report


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

6’
4’
10’
7’
10’
4’


2. toothache b. đau
3. head c. đau đầu
4. headache d. răng
5. hurt e. đầu
<b>I./ Pre_Reading </b>


<b>1. Pre _ Teach Vocabulary</b>
- a d<i><b>e</b></i>ntist : nha sĩ (situation)


- an app<i><b>o</b></i>intment : cuộc hẹn (explanation)
- scared (a) : sợ hãi (situation)


- a c<i><b>a</b></i>vity :lỗ sâu răng ( situation)


- (to) fill : trám (mine)


- a drill : cái khoang (picture)
* <i>Check</i> : Slap the board
<i>* Set the scene : Questions </i>
- Who's this ?


- What's the matter with him ?
- Where should he go to ?
<b>2. True / false prediction</b>


1.__ Minh has a toothache T


2.__ Hoa never goes to the dentist
3.__ Minh likes to go the dentist
4.__ The dentist is kind T


5.__ Hoa's tooth still hurts here


6.__ Minh is not scared after talking with Hoa T
<b>II./ While Reading </b>


<b>1. Read and check predictions </b>
<i><b>Keys </b>: T , F , F ,T , F, T </i>


<i>2. <b>Answer the Questions</b></i>
a. He has a toothache


b. No, he hates the sound of drill



c. Because she had a cavity in her tooth.
d. He filled the cavity in her teeth
<b>III./ Post - Reading </b>


<b>* Answer the questions :</b>


a. What did you do the last time you had a bad
toothache ?


b. Are you scared of seeing the dentist ?
c. What did the dentist do ?


d. How do you feel ?
<b>* Home work</b>


- Learn by heart new words .
- Prepare Lesson 5 – B ( 2, 3)


Teaches new words
following steps for
presenting vocabulary
Checks


Presents new lesson


Gives statements
Asks sts predict


Asks sts read and
check the prediction


Checks results
Runs through the
questions


Has sts to give answer
Checks results and
corrects


Hangs poster on Runs
through


Models


Asks sts to do


Checks results
Corrects Comments


Gives homework


Listen


Listen and repeat after
teacher


Write
Play game
Listen


Predict statements T/F


Give


Read and check
Give results
Work in pairs to
answer the questions
Give results


Listen


Answer the questions
Give results


Listen write


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

Week : 23rd <b><sub>Unit 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE </sub></b>


<b> Period : 64 Lesson 4: B2-3(p.104)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss listen and complete the summary </b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen and complete the </b>
summary


<b>SKILL : listening, speaking, and writing.</b>



<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
PROCEDUCE:


4’


6’


4’


<b>* Warm up</b>
<i>Jumble words</i>


1. ditenst = dentist
2. civyta = cavity
3. shrub = brush
4. achtoothe = toothache
5. lifl = fill


6. cersad = scared
<b>I./Pre _ Listening </b>


<b>1. Pre _ Teach Vocabulary </b>


- a s<i><b>u</b></i>rgery : phòng phẩu thuật (situation)
- (to) smile : cười mỉm (mine)


- s<i><b>e</b></i>rious (a) : nghiêm trọng (translation)
- (to) w<i><b>o</b></i>rry : lo lắng (example)


( worried (a) )



- pleased ( a ) : hài lòng (translation)
* <i>Check </i>: What and Where


<i>* Set the scene </i>


<b>2. True or false prediction</b>


a.__ Dr Lai is a doctor at QuangTrung school
b.__ She doesn’t wear uniform


c.__Children aren’t scared when they see her
d.__ She is a kind woman


e.__ She gives children some advice.


Checks attendances
Asks sts to rewrite the
words


Listens and corrects


Teaches new words
following steps for
presenting vocabulary
Checks


Presents new lesson
Gives statements
Asks sts predict


Asks sts to listen and
check the prediction
Checks results


Report
Rewrite
Listen


Listen and repeat after
teacher


Write
Play game
Listen


Predict statements T/F
Give


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

10’


7’


10’


4’


<b>II./ While – Listening </b>


<b>1. Listen and check the predictions :</b>
Keys :



a – T , b – T , c – F , d – T , e - T
<b>2 . Listen and answer the questions </b>
a. What is Dr. Lai's job ?


a dentist


b. What clothes does Dr Lai wear to work ?


uniform


c. How do most children feel when they come to
see Dr Lai ?


scared


d. How does Dr Lai help children ? explains
what will happen / give advice tell how to look
after their teeth/ remind them to clean tooth


<b>III./ Post _ Listening </b>


<i><b>* Read and complete the summary </b></i>
<i><b>Keys</b></i> :


(1) nervous
(2) smiles
(3) cavity
(4) brush
(5) pleased


<b>*Homework</b>


- Learn by heart new words .
- Prepare Lesson 6 B ( 4,5)


Runs through the
questions


Has sts to give answer
Checks results and
corrects


Hangs poster on Runs
through


Models


Asks sts to do
Checks results
Corrects Comments
Gives homework


Give results


Work in pairs to
answer the questions
Give results


Listen



Complete the summary
Give results


Listen write


Listen and prepare at
home


**************************************************************************************
Week : 23rd <b><sub>Unit 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE </sub></b>


<b> Period : 65 Lesson 5: B4-5(p.105-106)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss practice Why question word and answer with Because </b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice Why question </b>
word and answer with Because


<b>SKILL : speaking, and writing.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
PROCEDUCE:


4’ <b>* Warm up</b>


Jumbled words


1. ruth hurt


Checks attendances
Asks sts to rewrite the
words


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

6’


4’


17’


10’


2. tayvie
3. ditenst
4. shurb
5. cersad
6. totho


<b>I./ Presentation </b>


* Presentation structure


* Rub out and remember dialogue
A : Ow !


B : What the matter ?
A : I hurt.



B : Why do you hurt ?


A : Because I have a toothache .
* Concept checks :


Form :


- Why ...?


- Because ... (cause)
<b>II./ Practice </b>


1. Word cues drill.
a. His tooth / hurt
have / cavity


- His tooth hurt . Why ?
- Because he has a cavity
b. He / nervous


see/ dentist


c. Cavity / not serious
small


d. He / happy
teeth / OK
e. she / tired
stay up late
f. He / worry


a headache
<b>III./ Production</b>
<b>Writing </b>


<i>*What do/don’t we do to take care of your </i>
<i>teeth ?</i>


Do Don’t


- brush teeth after meals - use an old toothbrush
- brush teeth after get up - eat much candy


--


Listens and corrects


Presents new
structures following
steps for presenting
grammar


Concept checks


Gives words cues
Asks sts to practice
Checks


Asks sts read and
check the



Runs through the
questions


Has sts to give answer
Checks results and
corrects


Checks results
Corrects Comments


Listen


Listen and repeat after
teacher


Write
Observe
Listen


Practice in pairs
Give results


Listen and write


Answer the questions
Give results


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

4’ - <b><sub>* Home work</sub></b>



- Learn by heart new words .
- Prepare Unit 11 – Lesson 1


Gives homework


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 23rd <b><sub>Unit 11: KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY </sub></b>


<b> Period : 66 Lesson 1: A1(p.107-108)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss read a dialogue about medical check up </b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read a dialogue about </b>
medical check up.


SKILL : listening, speaking, and writing.


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
PROCEDUCE:


4’


6’



4’


<b>*Warm up</b>
<i>Pelmanism </i>


give take tell have be leave
had was/were left gave took told
<b>I./ Pre_Reading </b>


<i><b>1. Pre Teach Vocabulary </b></i>


- a medical check - up : khám tổng quát
(situation)


- a medical record : hồ sơ bệnh lí (translation)
- a height : chiều cao (example)


- (to) measure : đo (mine)
- (to )weigh : cân (mine)
- a scale : cai cân (picture)
*Check : Slap the board
<i>*Set the scene</i>


<i><b>2. Ordering statements</b></i>
a. The nurse weighed Hoa


b. Hoa returned to the waiting room
c. Hoa left the waiting room


d. The nurse measured Hoa


e. The called Hoa's name


f. Hoa filled in her medical record
g. The nurse took Hoa's temperature


h. The nurse told Hoa to go back to the waiting
room


<b>II./ While_Reading </b>


Checks attendances
Asks sts to match
Listens and corrects
Teaches new words
following steps for
presenting vocabulary
Checks


Presents new lesson
Gives statements
Asks sts predict


Asks sts read and
check the prediction
Checks results


Report


Guess the pairs pf
words



Listen


Listen and repeat after
teacher


Write
Play game
Listen


Predict the ordering
Give


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

10’
7’


10’


4’


<i>1. Read and check predictions</i>
<i>Keys :</i>


<i> f – c – e – g – d – a – h –b </i>
<i>2. Answer the Questions</i>


a. What are the students of Quang Trung school
having ? having a medical check up


b. What does Hoa must do before check - up ?



filled in the medical records


c. What did the nurse do ? took Hoa's
temperature, measured her, weighed her


d. Was Hoa's temperature normal ? Yes
e. What was her last year height ? 1m30


f. How heavy was she ? 40 kilos


<b>III./ Post - Reading </b>
* Answer about you :


a. Did you have a medical check up ?
b. What did the doctor do ?


c. What were your height ?
d. How heavy were you ?
<b>* Homework</b>


- Learn by heart new words .
- Prepare lesson 2 A (2,3)


Runs through the
questions


Has sts to give answer
Checks results and
corrects



Hangs poster on Runs
through


Models


Asks sts to do
Checks results
Corrects Comments


Gives homework


Work in pairs to
answer the questions
Give results


Listen


Answer the questions
Give results


Listen write


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 24th

<b>Unit 11: KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY</b>



<b> Period : 67 Lesson 2: A2-3(p.108-109)</b>



Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss listen to a dialogue about medical check up and ask and answer the</b>
questions about the medical record.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen to a dialogue </b>
about medical check up and ask and answer the questions about the medical record.
<b>SKILL : listening, speaking, and writing.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
PROCEDUCE:


4’ <b>*Warm up</b>


Pelmanison


Name temperative weight height age


40kilos 1m45 Hoa 14 370<sub>C</sub>


Checks attendances
Asks sts to match
Listens and corrects


Report


Guess the pairs of
words



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

6’


2’
10’


9’


10’


4’


<b>I./ Pre - Listening </b>
<i><b>1. Pre Teach Vocabulary</b></i>.


- a male

 female : nam ≠ nữ (antonym)


-( to) cover : hồn thành (translation)
- a forename : tên và chữ lót (example)
<i>* Check : R & R</i>


<i>* Set the scene</i> :
- Who's this ?


- What are they doing ?
<i><b>2. Prediction Questions </b></i>


- What does doctor ask Hoa about ?
<b>II. While _ Listening </b>


<i><b>1. Listen and check predictions </b></i>


Keys : age , height , weigh


<i><b>2. Listen and then write the missing words</b></i>
<i>Keys</i> :


Doctor : ask - How
Hoa : 14


Doctor : your - 50
Hoa : shorter - me
Doctor : tell


Hoa : meter - centimeters
Doctor : will - nurse - height
Hoa : think


Doctor : No - form
<b>III./ Post_Listening </b>


<i><b>* Interview and fill in the medical record </b></i>
- Which school do you study ?


- What's your surname ?
- What's your address ?
- How old are you ?
- What's your height ?
- How heavy are you ?
<b>* Home work</b>


- Learn by heart new words .


- Prepare Lesson 3 – B (1)


Teaches new words
following steps for
presenting vocabulary
Checks


Presents new lesson
Gives questions
Asks sts to predict
Asks sts read and
check the prediction
Checks results
Runs through the
dialogue


Has sts to give answer
Checks results and
corrects


Hangs poster on Runs
through


Models


Asks sts to do
Checks results
Corrects Comments


Gives homework



Listen and repeat after
teacher


Write
Play game


Listen and answer
Predict the answers
Give answers
Read and check
Give results
Work in pairs to
complete the dialogue
Give results


Listen


Answer the questions
Give results


Listen write


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

Week : 24th

<b>Unit 11: KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY</b>



<b> Period : 68 Lesson 3: B1(p.110)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :



<b>AIM:To help ss read a dialogue and answer the questions. </b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read a dialogue and </b>
answer the questions.


<b>SKILL : listening, speaking, and writing.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
PROCEDUCE:


5’


6’


4’


7’


10’


<b>*Warm up</b>
- Jumbled words
1. luf flu
2. docl


3. chaheade
4. chatotheo
5. achmaoachste
<b>I./ Pre- reading </b>



<i>1. Pre Teach Vocabulary </i>
- a v<i><b>i</b></i>rus : vi khuẩn (situation)


- a sick note : bệnh trạng (explanation)
- (to) stay inside : ở trong (translation)
* <i>Check</i> : Listen and repeat


<i>* Set the scene : Situation </i>


<i>- Lan absented class yesterday because she </i>
<i>was sick. To day her teacher meets and asks </i>
<i>her some questions </i>


2. <i>True or false prediction</i>


a. __ Lan had a bad cold yesterday. T


b. __ Lan had a toothache, too. F


c. __ Lan feels a litle tired now . T


d. __ Lan's mother wrote a sick note. F
e. __ Lan also has a virus. T


<b>II./ - While - Reading </b>


<i>1. Read and check the prediction.</i>


<i>Keys : a – T , b – F , c – T , d – F , e - T </i>


<i>2. Answer the questions.</i>


a. Why didn't Lan go to school yesterday ?


Checks attendances
Asks sts to rewrite
Listens and corrects
Teaches new words
following steps for
presenting vocabulary
Checks


Presents new lesson
Gives statements
Asks sts predict


Asks sts read and
check the prediction
Checks results
Runs through the


Report


Rewrite words
Give results
Listen


Listen and repeat after
teacher



Write
Play game
Listen


Predict statements T/F
Give


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

10’


3’


- Because she had a bad cold


b. What was wrong with her ?


- She had a headache


c. What does Mr Tan tell lan to do ?


- Mr. Tan told her to stay inside at recess


d. What did the doctor say about Lan's
problem ?


- The doctor said that she had a virus


e. Who wrote Lan's sick note ?


- The doctor wrote Lan’s sick note



<b>III./ Post- Reading </b>
<i><b> - Speaking</b></i>


<i><b>Imagine you absented class yesterday .Today</b></i>
<i><b>you go to school your friend the reason why</b></i>
<i><b>* Suggested questions </b></i>


<i>-</i> Where were you yesterday ?
- What were the matter with you ?
- What did you do to solve it ?
- What did the doctor do ?
- How do you feel now ?
<b>*- Homework</b>


- Learn by heart new words .
- Prepare Lesson 4 - B ( 2,3 )


questions


Has sts to give answer
Checks results and
corrects


Hangs poster on Runs
through


Models


Asks sts to do
Checks results


Corrects
Comments
Gives homework


Give results
Listen


Answer the questions
Give results


Listen write


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

Week : 24th

<b>Unit 11: KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY</b>



<b> Period : 69 Lesson 4: B2-3(p.110)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help students continue to review vocabulary about the common illness, </b>
they listen to the tape for specific information . Practice listening and speaking
skills .


OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review vocabulary about
the common illness, they listen to the tape for specific information .


<b>SKILL : listening, speaking, and writing.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>


PROCEDUCE:


5’


6’


4’
17’


<i><b>I/Warm up:</b></i>

Have Ss play a game :
Networks


<i><b>I.Pre - listening</b></i>



<b>* Open Prediction</b>
* Answer key:


Cold Flu Stomachache Headache Toothache


10 43 37 5 17


Total days lost : 112


<i><b>II/ While-listening:</b></i>



<b>1. Check listening:</b>
<b>2.Survey</b>


Name Cold Flu Headache Stomachache Toothache



Has Ss play a
game


T runs through the
table B3 P111.
-Has Ss predict the
days lost through
sickness in class
7A last semester .
-Calls on some Ss
to give their
predictions
- T checks and
give correct
answers


Introduces the aim


Report


Rewrite words
Give results
Listen


- Ss listen to the
tape and check
their prediction .
- Ss listen to the
tape o and fill in
the table.



- T checks and
give correct
answers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

10’


3’
Eg:


1. Were you absent from school last month ?
2. Were you sick ?


3. Did you have a bad cold ?
4. How do you feel now ?


5. Lan didn't go to school. What was wrong with her ?
6. What was the most common illness?


7. What was the least common illness?


<i><b>III/ Post-listening:</b></i>



<b>* Discussing</b>


EX: Last semester in class 7A , cold caused 10 days’
absence but in my class cold caused 7 days’absence …….


<i><b>V.Homework :</b></i>




- Write the comparation in the notebooks .
- Do exercise 3 at page 71 in workbook .
- Prepare part B4 .


of the exercise .
Asks Ss to work in
groups of four
and ask them to
choose a secretary
for their group.
Has Ss use the
table B2 to take a
survey


Asks Ss to


compare the days
lost through
sickness in class
7A with those in
their own class
Asks some Ss to
report in front of
the class .


Remarks.
Asks ss to do
exercises at home


questions


Give results
Listen
Answer the
questions
Give results
Listen write


Listen and prepare
at


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

Week : 25th

<b>Unit 11: KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY</b>

<sub> </sub>


<b> Period : 70 Lesson 5: B4(p.110)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help students read and understand the text. To help them know well about</b>
the most common disease : the common cold, its symptoms, its cure ans its
prevention.


OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to To help students read
and understand the text. To help them know well about the most common disease :
the common cold, its symptoms, its cure ans its prevention.


<b>SKILL : reading, listening, speaking and writing.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures, cassette</b>
PROCEDUCE:



5’


6’


4’


<i><b>I/Warm up:</b><b>*Brainstorming</b></i>


<i><b>II/Pre-reading</b></i>:


<i><b> 1)Preteach vocabulary.</b></i>


- a s<i><b>y</b></i>mptom : triệu chứng ( translation)
- a fever = a temperature : bệnh sốt
( explanation)


- (to) cough : ho ( mime)


- ( to) sneeze : hắt xì hơi, nhảy mũi ( mime)
- (to) cure :chữa trị ( explanation)


-> a cure : cách chữa trị


- (to) prev<i><b>e</b></i>nt from : phòng ngừa( translation)
<i><b>* Checking vocabulary</b></i> : R.O.R


<i><b> 2)T / F statements</b></i>:


Ex. running nose, slight fever, coughing,



- Have Ss in two groups
go to the board and write
some disease they have
known.


T gives feedback


T elicits
T models
T checks


pronunciation, stress,
meaning, kind of
words.


T checks again by
ROR.


Ss do
Ss display


Ss guess


Ss repeat individually
and chorally.


Ss copy down
Some



diseases toothache
headache


sore throat


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

7’


10’


10’


sneezing ... a. People call the cold the common
cold. b. Nobody knows the symptoms of the common
cold.


c. Everybody knows how to cure it.


d. There are only medicine to relieve its symptoms.
e. The cold won't disppear if you don't take any
medicine.


f. You should eat well, do exercise to prevent the
cold.


<i><b>III)While- reading</b></i>
<i><b>1)Read the text:</b></i>


a. T ; c. F Everybody -> Nobody


b. F Nobody -> Everybody; d. T


e. F => The cold will last for a few days then
disappear.


f . T


<i><b> 2). Comprehension questions:</b></i>


Key: a. Because every year millions of people
catch it. b. They are: a runny nose, a slight fever,
coughing, sneezing,...


c. No. There is no cure for the common cold.
d. No. The medicines don 't cure a cold, but they
only relieve the symptoms.


e. We can prevent the cold by eating well, doing
exercise ....


<i><b>IV)Post-reading:</b></i>
<b>1) </b><i><b>Discussion</b></i><b>:</b>


b. <i><b>Matching.</b></i> <i><b>Match the problems to</b></i>
<i><b>advice.</b></i>


1. A sore throat a. Don 't smoke.
2. A cough b. Take some
asprins.


3. A toothache c. Drink a lot of syrup
liquid



4. A headache d. See the dentist


- Have Ss tell some
symptoms of the
common cold
- Have Ss read the
given - Feed back Ss '
prediction.statements
and predict if they are
T or F.


- Have Ss read the text
silently and correct
their prediction.
- Feed back their
answers


- Have them correct
their false sentences
- Get Ss to read the
text again to find out
the answers for the
given questions.
- Let them play " LN
game" to check.


- Have Ss work in
groups of four.



In groups, Ss discuss
the feathers, symptoms
and precaution of the
common cold. Call on
some groups to report
their ideas.


- Call on Ss in two
groups go to the board
and write their ideas.


Ss guess in pairs


Ss display


Ss read the text and
check True or false.
Ss say their ideas


Ss work in groups to
answer the questions
-Take part in the game
“LN” in team


-compete


-Match


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

3’



5. The flu e. Eat well,
exercise


6. A common cold f. Get some medicine
. from the
drugstore Key: 1 . a , 2.c , 3. d ,4. b ,5 . f
, 6 . e


<i><b>V)Homework</b></i>


-Learn by heart the new words


- Read again the text then write the answers
for the questions (page 112- text book


- Feed back Ss' work.
- Ask ss to take notes
what t said


-Take notes


Week : 25th <b><sub> TEST ONE PERIOD</sub></b>


<b> Period : 71 ENGLISH 7 – TIME ALLOTTED : 45’</b>
<b> </b>


<b>NAME:………</b>
<b>CLASS 7 </b>


<b>Teacher’s remarks</b>



I/ QUESTION 1: LISTENING(2,5ms)


 <i><b>Listen and fill in the blanks with the words you hear:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

<b>past nine. At the party they will eat ……(4)…..cakes, drink fruit juice and sing</b>
<b>many songs. Tuan Anh will get nice presents from his friends. He will be</b>
<b>very………(5)………..</b>


<b>1/………..</b> <b> 2/……… 3/</b>


<b>………</b> <b>4/………</b>


<b>5……….</b>
<b>II/ QUESTION 2 : READING (2.5ms)</b>


 <i><b>Read the passage and do the exercises :</b></i>


<b> A week ago , Huy’s family went for a picnic in the country . It </b>
<b>was early spring,so they thought it was too cold to go to the seaside .</b>
<b> They set off early after breakfast and drove about 45 km into </b>
<b>the country until they came to their favorite place . Huy and his sister </b>
<b>went into the woods to pick up wild flowers . Huy’s parents sat quietly ,</b>
<b>fishing by the stream .</b>


<b> At 4 p.m , they put the places , cups , saucers and other things</b>
<b>back into the basket and went back to their car . They got home at </b>
<b>5p.m .</b>


<i><b> *Answer the questions : (2,5ms)</b></i>



<b>a.Where did Huy’s family go for a picnic ?</b>


<b>………</b>
<b>b.How did they go there ?</b>


<b>………</b>
<b>c.How far is it from their house to the countryside ?</b>


<b>………</b>
<b>d.What did they do?</b>


<b>………</b>
<b>e.When did they come back home ?</b>


<b>………</b>
<b> III/ QUESTION 3 : WRITING (2,5ms)</b>


 <i><b>Put the words into the correct order to make complete sentences :</b></i>
<b>1.Tien/ in / watered / the school garden / the flower.</b>


<b>………</b>
<b>2. played/ my children / the garden / yesterday / in .</b>


<b>………</b>
<b>3. Sang and Lan / the market / to / went / buy / to / some sweets and cakes .</b>
<b>………</b>
<b> 4. either / I / like / don’t / beef / , .</b>


<b>………</b>


<b> 5. you / Did / durians / like / ? .</b>


<b>………</b>
<b> IV/ QUESTION 4 : GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY: (2,5ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

<b>a. be </b> <b>b. is </b> <b>c. were</b> <b>d. was</b>
<b> 2. They ………. cheap , but I wanted to buy .</b>


<b> a. was </b> <b>b. weren’t </b> <b>c. aren’t </b> <b>d. didn’t</b>


<b> 3. Nga ………..in Hanoi two years ago .</b>


<b> a. lives </b> <b>b. live </b> <b>c. living </b> <b>d. lived</b>


<b> 4. If you have a toothache , you will go to the ……….</b>


<b> a. doctor </b> <b>b. teacher </b> <b>c. nurse </b> <b>d. dentist</b>


<b> 5. ………is this hat?- It’s 5000 dong.</b>


<b> a. How far </b> <b>b. tall</b> <b>c. How much </b> <b> d. How long</b>


<b> 6. ……….. was she?- She was 1m45 .</b>


<b> a. How heavy</b> <b>b. How old</b> <b>c. How tall </b> <b>d. How</b>


<b> 7. Lan didn’t ………to school yesterday because she had a bad </b>
<b>toothache.</b>


<b> a. go</b> <b>b. went</b> <b>c. to go </b> <b>d. goes</b>



<b> 8. Nam visited me ……… Tuesday.</b>


<b> a. on </b> <b>b. last </b> <b>c. every </b> <b>d. in</b>


<b> 9. Would you ………. off the radio ?</b>


<b> a. turn </b> <b>b. to turn </b> <b>c. turning </b> <b>d.turned</b>


<b> 10. They ……….. to Vung Tau last week.</b>


<b> a. went </b> <b>b. go </b> <b>c. goes </b> <b> d. go</b>


<b> </b>


<b>The end</b>


<b>Date:</b>
<b>Period: 72</b>


<b>Test Correction</b>


<b>I/ QUESTION 1: LISTENING(2,5ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

<b>1/…45…(0,5)…………..</b> <b> 2/………12……(0,5)………… 3/……</b>
<b>6.30……(0,5)……… 4/………birthday………(0,5)………</b>


<b>5………happy……(0,5)……….</b>


<b> </b>


<b>II/ QUESTION 2 : READING (2.5ms)</b>


 <i><b>Read the passage and do the exercises :</b></i>


<b> A week ago , Huy’s family went for a picnic in the country . It </b>
<b>was early spring,so they thought it was too cold to go to the seaside .</b>
<b> They set off early after breakfast and drove about 45 km into </b>
<b>the country until they came to their favorite place . Huy and his sister </b>
<b>went into the woods to pick up wild flowers . Huy’s parents sat quietly ,</b>
<b>fishing by the stream .</b>


<b> At 4 p.m , they put the places , cups , saucers and other things</b>
<b>back into the basket and went back to their car . They got home at </b>
<b>5p.m .</b>


<b> *</b><i><b>Answer the questions : (2,5ms)</b></i>


<b>1.Where did Huy’s family go for a picnic ?</b>


<b>…………They went for a pinic in the country(0,5)………</b>
<b>2.How did they go there ?</b>


<b>…………They went there by car………(0,5)……….</b>
<b>3.How far is it from their house to the countryside ?</b>


<b>…………It’s about 45 km……(0,5)………</b>
<b>4.What did they do?</b>


<b>…………Huy and his sister went into the woods to pick up wild </b>
<b>flowers. Huy’s parents sat quietly, fishing by the stream…(0,5)</b>


<b>………..</b>


<b>5.When did they come back home ?</b>


<b>…………They went home at 5p.m……(0,5)……….</b>
<b> III/ QUESTION 3 : WRITING (2,5ms)</b>


 <i><b>Put the words into the correct order to make complete sentences :</b></i>
3. <b>Tien/ in / watered / the school garden / the flowers.</b>


<b>……Tien watered the flowers in the school garden…(0,5)………..</b>
<b>2. played/ my children / the garden / yesterday / in .</b>


<b>……My children played in the garden yesterday……(0,5)……….</b>
<b>3. Sang and Lan / the market / to / went / buy / to / some sweets and cakes .</b>
<b>Sang and Lan went to the market to buy some sweets and cakes(0,5)……..</b>
<b> 4. How/ were/ tall/ you/?.</b>


<b>……How tall were you?...(0,5)...</b>
<b> 5. you / Did / bananas / like / ? .</b>


<b>……Did you like bananas?...(0,5)...</b>
<b> IV/ QUESTION 4 : GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY: (2,5ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

<b>a. be </b> <b>b. is </b> <b>c. were</b> <i><b>d. was(0,25)</b></i>
<b> 2. They ………. cheap , but I wanted to buy .</b>


<b> a. was </b> <i><b>b. weren’t</b></i><b> (0,25)</b> <b>c. aren’t </b> <b>d. didn’t</b>


<b> 3. Nga ………..in Hanoi two years ago .</b>



<b> a. lives </b> <b>b. live </b> <b>c. living </b> <i><b>d. lived(0,25)</b></i>


<b> 4. If you have a toothache , you will go to the ……….</b>


<b> a. doctor </b> <b>b. teacher </b> <b>c. nurse </b> <i><b>d. dentist(0,25)</b></i>


<b> 5. Lan didn’t ……… to school yesterday because she had a bad </b>
<b>cold.</b>


<b> a. went</b> <i><b>b.go(0,25)</b></i> <b>c. going </b> <b>d. to go</b>
<b> 6.How ………were you? – I was 1m37.</b>


<b> a. heavy</b> <i><b>b. tall(0,25)</b><b> </b><b> </b></i> <b>c. far</b> <b>d. old</b>
<b> 7. ………is this hat?-It’s 5000 dong.</b>


<b> a. How far </b> <b>b. How long c. How many </b><i><b>d. How much(0,25)</b></i>
<b> 8. Nam visited me ……… Tuesday.</b>


<b> a. on </b> <i><b>b. last </b><b> (0,25)</b> <b> </b></i> <b>c. every </b> <b>d. in</b>
<b> 9. Would you ………. off the radio ?</b>


<b> </b><i><b>a. turn</b></i><b> (0,25)</b> <b>b. to turn </b> <b>c. turning </b> <b>d.turned</b>
<b> 10. They ……….. to Vung Tau last week.</b>


<i> <b>a. went</b><b> </b></i><b>(0,25) </b> <b>b. go </b> <b>c. goes </b> <b> d. go</b>
<b> </b>


<b> </b>



<b> The end</b>


Week : 26th

<b>Unit 12: LET’S EAT</b>



<b> Period : 73 Lesson 1: A1(p.114-115)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM: To understand the details; know new target iterm neither, either, so, too </b>
through the text.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson sts will be able to need a text to understand </b>
the details; know new target iterm neither, either, so, too througs
the text.


<b>SKILL : reading,listening, speaking, and writing.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

5’


8’


4’


7’


10’


<i><b>I/Warm up:</b></i>



<i><b>*Brainstorm.</b></i>


<i><b>II/Pre-reading:</b></i>


<i><b>+Pre-teach vocabulary.</b></i>


- (to) hate ≠ (to) love : ghét ≠ yêu
( antonym)


- pork : thịt heo ( explanation)
- sp<i><b>i</b></i>nach : rau chân vịt ( picture)
- a c<i><b>u</b></i>cumber : dưa leo (realia)
- a pap<i><b>a</b></i>ya : đu đủ ( realia)
- a pine<i><b>a</b></i>pple : trái khóm ( picture)
- a d<i><b>u</b></i>rian : trái sầu riêng ( picture)
- ripe: chín ≠ green (adj) (antonym)
<i><b>* Checking vocabulary : R. O .R</b></i>


<i><b> +Set the scene:</b></i>


Who are they in the picture? - Hoa and her
aunt. Where are they now? - They are at the
market.


. + Open prediction


What did Hoa and her aunt buy ?


<i><b>III/While- reading</b></i>


<i><b>+</b></i><b>Answer Key:</b>
- beef


- vegetables


- spinach & cucumbers
- oranges


<b>+Comprehension questions</b>


1. What did Hoa and her aunt buy at the
market ?


2. Does Hoa like pork ? What about her
aunt ?


T gives the topic
T models


T corrects and
congratulates


T elicits
T models
T checks


pronunciation, stress,
meaning, kind of
words.



T checks again by
ROR.


T sets the scene


T gives open
prediction


T asks ss to read the
dialogue and correct


T gives questions on
b.


Ss say & write on b.


Ss guess


Ss repeat individually
and chorally.


Ss copy down


Ss guess


Ss do and write.


Ss read and correct
themselves



Ss work in group and
discuss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

8’


3’


3. What meat would they like for dinner ?
4. What are the favorite vegetables of Hoa's
Aunt ?


5. What fruit did they buy ?


6. Why didn't they buy a papaya and
a pineapple ?


<i><b> IV/Post-reading</b></i>


<i><b>* </b></i>Talk about food you like or dislike
Eg exchange: * What food do you
like ?


- I like chicken, eggs ...
* What food don't you like ?
- I don't like papayas


<i><b>V/Homework</b></i>


-Learn by heart the new words
-Do the exercises



-Prepare A2


T requests ss to work
in group to answer.


T gives corrections
T gives the topic and
has ss discuss in pairs


T gives feedback


T asks ss to learn the
lesson and do the
exercises.


Prepares the next
lesson


Ss give their answer
before the class.


Ss work in groups and
display their ideas
before the class.


Ss take notes.


Week : 26th

<b>Unit 12: LET’S EAT</b>




<b> Period : 74 Lesson 2: A2(p.115-116)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM: To know new target iterm neither, either, so, too through the text A</b>1.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson sts will be able to understand know new </b>
target item neither, either, so, too through the text A2.


<b>SKILL : speaking, and writing.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
PROCEDUCE:


5’ <i><b><sub>I/Warm up:</sub></b><b><sub>Kim’s game:</sub></b></i>


Ex: carrot, tomato, potato, milk, beef, water,


T asks Ss to look at the
picture about some


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

8’


4’


7’


10’



soda, noodles, rice, chicken, fish, banana,
apple, peas, orange...


<i><b>II/Presentation:</b></i>


<i><b>*MODEL SENTENCE</b></i>


a. Hoa: I like spinach and cucumbers.
Aunt: So do I / I do , too.


b. Hoa: I don’t like pork.
<b>Aunt: Neither do I. / I don’t,either.</b>


 <b>Form: Too, So, either, neither</b>


 <b>* Too, So có nghĩa “cũng vậy”, dung trong</b>
câu khẳng định.


+ Dùng ‘TOO’ đứng ở cuối câu, trước nó có
dấu phẩy và không đảo ngữ


+ Dùng ‘ SO’ đứng ở đầu câu, có đảo ngữ.
EX: -I’m hungry. - She loves
papaya.


She is, too. So do
they.


*EITHER và NEITHER có nghĩa “cũng


khơng”, dùng trong câu phủ định


+Neither= Not either(Khi dùng Neither thì
đảo ngữ)


Ex: She doesn’t cook well.
Neither do I./ I don’t either.
<i><b>III/ Practice:</b></i>


<i><b>*</b></i><b> </b><i><b>Picture drill.</b></i>


a. carrots. v
S1: I like carrots. .


S2: So do I / I do , too..
b. pork x


S1: She doesn’t like pork.


S2:Her sister doesn’t either./ Neither does her
sister.


d. Apples v
e. Papayas x
f. Beef v
g. Cucumber x
<i><b> IV/Production:</b></i>


food and remember.
After that they go to


the board and write.
( Don’t look at the
picture )


T gives model
sentences


T elicits the Model
Sentences


T has ss to practice
speaking.


T gives correction


( look at the picture
again ).


Ss copy down


Ss work in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

8’


3’


 <i>Fill in the blanks with the suitable words:</i>
<i>a<b>/</b>She is happy. – So……I</i>


<i>b/ He likes durians. – So …… she.</i>


<i>c/ They are not busy. – Neither ………I</i>
<i>d/ They don’t like apples. – Neither………he.</i>
<i><b>V/Homework</b></i>


-Learn by heart the new words
-Do the exercises


-Prepare A2


T prepares them on a
poster.


T asks ss to do
homework.


And prepare the next
lesson.


Ss fill in the blank.


Ss listen and do
what t said


Week : 26th

<b>Unit 12: LET’S EAT</b>



<b> Period : 75 Lesson 3: A3-4(p.116-118)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :



<b>AIM: To read A3 write the menu of things they eat yesterday.</b>


OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson sts will be able to read A3 write the menu
of things they eat yesterday.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
PROCEDUCE:


5’


8’


4’
7’


<i><b>I. Warm up</b></i>

<b> ( slap the board)</b>


<i><b>II. Pre – reading</b></i>



<b>*Pre - teach vocab.</b>


- (to) slice : cắt miếng (visual)


- (to) add: thêm vào (trans.)
- a green pepper: ớt xanh (realia)


- (to) heat : làm nóng(trans.)
- a pan: cái chảo (visual . P117)
- (to) stir fry : xào (trans.)



- soy sauce (unc) : xì dầu, nước tương( realia
- dish (unc) : món ăn (situation)


- (to) set a table : dọn cơm ( situation)


- a plate : cái dĩa (realia)
- chopsticks (Ns) : đôi đũa (realia)
- a spoon : cái muỗng (realia)


=> Check vocab: Matching


* Set the scene: Hoa and her aunt prepared the
dinner


<b>*. Ordering statements</b>


<i><b>III.While reading</b></i>



<i><b>* Answer Key:</b></i>


2-a- First, she sliced the beef


4-b- Then she cooked some rice and boiled ...
1-c- Hoa's aunt cooked dinner


3-d- Next she sliced some green papers and
onions


7-e- And then she set the table and her family sat



T asks ss to play a game


T gives congratulation to
the winner team.


T elicits
T models
T checks


pronunciation, stress,
meaning, kind of
words.


T checks again by
matching


T sets the scene


- Asks Sts to read A3 .
P116 and check their
predictions.


- T checks with WC


Ss follow and
check and correct
( look at the poster
again ).



Ss guess
Ss repeat


individually and
chorally.


Ss copy down


Ss follow T


Ss guess ordering
satements


onion


beef
spinach


peas
cucumber


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

10’


4’


4’


3’


down to eat



5-f- After that, she stir fried the beef and
vegetables


6-g- Finally, she sliced the cucumbers and made
cucumber salad


<b>* Questions</b>


Answer key: - Cucumber salad with onions
- Boiled spinach


- stir fried beef with green paper paper and onions
- Rice


<b>*.Filling</b>


Answer key: 2. slice 5. add


3. heat 6. boil / cook
4. stir fry 7. add
<b>*Matching </b>


Answer key: 1 c 2 f 3 a 4 d 5 b 6


-e 7 - g


<i><b>IV.Post-reading:</b></i>



group work ( four groups)



Eg exchange: Yesterday for breakfast I drank milk,
ate bread ...


For breakfast I ate ...
For lunch I ate ...


<i><b>V.Homework </b></i>



- Read & translate B3
- Finish their own menu.


-

Learn new words in by heart, - Prepare: B1


* Comp. question: Ask
sts to work in group of
Write things Hoa and
her aunt ate.


+ Have sts to do A3 - b
(P116) : Add missing
verbs


* Matching: Ask sts to
watch the instruction
A1 - b. P116 to the
pictures on P117


Asks sts to write their
own menu about things


they ate yesterday.
Asks Sts to write at
home


T asks ss to do
homework.


And prepare the next
lesson.


Ss work in pairs


Ss display


- Ask sts to write
their own menu
about things they
ate yesterday.


- Asks Sts to write
at home


Ss listen and do
what t said


Week : 27th

<b>Unit 12: LET’S EAT</b>

<sub> </sub>


<b> Period : 76 Lesson 4: B1(p.119)</b>



Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM: To listen for details and retell the story</b>


OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson sts will be able to listen for details and
retell the story


<b>SKILL : listening, reading, speaking, and writing.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
<i><b>Menu</b></i>


1. Breakfast : milk, bread ....
2. Lunch : ....


3. Dinner : ....
4. Supper : ...


<i><b>Menu</b></i>
1. Breakfast : milk, bread ....
2. Lunch : ....


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

PROCEDUCE:
5’


8’


7’



8’


6’


<i>I.Warm up Network</i>

<i> </i>
cold


headache


<i><b>II.Pre listening / reading</b></i>



<i><b>*Pre - teach vocab.</b></i>
- a dirt: vết bẩn (situation)
 d<i><b>i</b></i>rty (a) : bẩn


=> Check vocabulary: ROR
<b>* Set the scene: </b>


Ba went to the doctor because he was sick.
What ‘s the matter with him?


<i><b>III. While-listening/reading:</b></i>



<b>* Check :T/F statements</b>


* <i><b>Answer key</b></i>


1. Ba had a headache. F
2.He was at the doctor'’s .T



3. He ate spinach, but his partents didn’t. T
4.His mum washes the spinach. F


5. Vegetables often have dirt on it. T
6. That dirt. can’t make him sick. F



<b>*Comprehension questions</b>
1. What did Ba eat last night ?
2. Who washed the spinach ?
3. Why did Ba go to the doctor's ?
4. What made him sick ?


<b>* Gaps filling</b>
Answer key:


1. doctor's 6. wash


T asks ss to play a
game


T gives congratulation
to the winner team.
T elicits


T models
T checks


pronunciation, stress,
meaning, kind of


words.


T checks again by ROR
T sets the scene


- Asks Sts to read B1 .


P119 and check their
predictions.


- T checks again
And corrects


* Comp. question: Ask
ss to work in group to
answer the questions


+ Has ss to do B1


(P119) : Add missing
words


Ss follow and
check and correct
( look at the poster
again ).


Ss guess
Ss repeat



individually and
chorally.


Ss copy down
Ss guess T?F?
Ss follow T
Ss read


Ss read the text
again and answer
the questions


Ss work in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

10’


1’


2. ill / sick 7. carefully


3. asked 8. vegetable / spinach


4. ate 9. make


5. spinach 10. the doctor / she
11. medicine


<b>*Listening: B4</b>
- Answer key :



Lan : f, b, d ,g Nga : a, d ,g
Ba : c, a , e , h Hoa : b , e , g .
Eg: Lan ate beef, noodles and vegetables .
She drank juice


…………..


<i><b>V.Homework </b></i>



- Read & translate B1


- Learn new words in by heart


- Prepare: B2-4


Asks sts to write their
own menu about things
they ate yesterday.
Asks Sts to write at
home


T turns on the cassette
three times and has ss
to listen to it carefully.


T corrects


T asks ss to do
homework.



And prepare the next
lesson.


Ss to listen to T to
write at home
Ss display their
ideas on b.


Ss listen and do
what t said


Week : 27th

<b>Unit 12: LET’S EAT</b>



<b> Period : 77 Lesson 5: B2,3,4(p.120-121)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help students read and understand the text for details about the balance diet </b>
in order to keep feed and stay healthy.


OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read and understand the
text for details about the balance diet in order to keep feed and stay healthy.


<b>SKILL : reading,listening, speaking, and writing.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
<i><b>Menu</b></i>



1. Breakfast : milk, bread ....
2. Lunch : ....


3. Dinner : ....
4. Supper : ...


<i><b>Menu</b></i>
1. Breakfast : milk, bread ....
2. Lunch : ....


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

PROCEDUCE:
5’


6’


4’


<i><b>I/Warm up:</b></i>
<i><b>*Brainstorm.</b></i>


? How many groups of food can we classify?
What are they?


Body- building
food


Groups of food : Energy-giving
food


Protective food


<i><b>For example</b></i> : Body building food : meat,
fish, chicken , beef, pork, milk, eggs,....


<i><b>II/Pre-reading:</b></i>


<i><b>+Pre-teach vocabulary.</b></i>


- a b<i><b>a</b></i>lanced diet : chế độ ăn cân đối
( explanation)


- a m<i><b>o</b></i>derate amount : số lượng vừa
phải(explanation)


- d<i><b>i</b></i>ary products : sản phẩm từ sữa
(example)


- c<i><b>e</b></i>reals : ngũ cốc
(example)


- <i><b>e</b></i>nergy : năng lượng
(translation)


- guideline = advice : lời khuyên, chỉ
dẫn (synonym)


<i><b>* Checking vocabulary : R. O .R</b></i>
<i><b> +Set the scene:</b></i>


* <i><b>True / false statements</b></i>.



a. The food we eat affects to our whole life.
b. Sugar gives us energy and make us feel less
hungry.


c. We shouldn't eat all the food we enjoy
d. We should eat a lot of fatty food and sugar.
e. We should eat many kinds of food but we


Checks attendances
Asks sts to rewrite
Listens and corrects
- Has Ss work in three


- In groups, they
discuss and decide
which group the food
belongs to .


Teaches new words
following steps for
presenting vocabulary
Checks


Presents new lesson
Gives statements
Asks sts predict
Hangs poster on Runs
through


Models



Asks sts to do
Checks results
Corrects


- Lets Ss read the text
silently to correct their
prediction.


-Feed back Ss' answers.
- Has them correct the
false sentences


-Has Ss read the text


Report


Rewrite words
Give results
Listen


Listen and repeat after
teacher


Write
Play game
Listen


Predict statements T/F
Give



Read and check
Give results
Work in pairs to
answer the questions
Give results


Listen


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

7’


10’


10’
3’


shouldn't eat too much of anything.


f. We should do exercise regularly to keef fit.
<i><b>III/While- reading</b></i>


1. <i><b>Read and check</b></i>.


. Key: a . T d. F
b. T e. T
c. F f. T
2. <i><b>Comprehension questions</b></i>.
1. Why is sugar important?


2. What does a balanced diet mean?



3. What should we eat to have a balanced
diet?


4. Is only a balanced diet enough for a healthy
lifestyle?


5. What should we do to have a balanced diet?
6. Do you think your diet is balanced?
<i><b>IV/Post-reading</b></i>


<i><b>* Write it up</b></i>. Write the menu for your family.
<i><b>V/Homework</b></i>


-Learn by heart the new words
-Do Ex 2,3/P77,78-WB


again to find down the
answers for the
following questions.
-Has Ss play LN game
to check.


-Get Ss to work in
groups of four: Some
groups write the menu
for breakfast, some
groups write for lunch
and others write for
dinner.



-Call on some groups
to write their menu on
the board.


-Give feedback.
Comments
Gives homework


Listen write


-Note: Three groups of
food should be in the
menu.


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 27th

<b>Unit 12: LET’S EAT</b>



<b> Period : 78 Lesson 6: LANGUAGUE FOCUS 4</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help students talk about past activities, review indifinite quantifiers, too /</b>
so / either / neither imperatives.


OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson sts will able to talk about past activities,


review indifinite quantifiers, too / so / either / neither imperatives.


<b>SKILL : reading,listening, speaking, and writing.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

5’


6’


12’


<b>1. Past simple tense </b>
Mapped dialogue.


You Your friend


a. Did you do your home work ?
No, I watched TV.


b. ... dinner at home ?
No, ... restaurant


c. ... school yesterday ?
No, ... movie theater


d. ... watch TV ?


No, ... read books


e. ... play computer games ? No,
... soccer.



Example exchange: - Did you do your homework ?
- No, I watched TV


<b>2. Infefinite quantifiers </b>


+ a little + N (unc) : một ít
+ a lot of / lots of + N (unc) / Ns : nhiều


+ too much + N (unc) : rất nhiều
Answer key: A. a lot of or a little


B. A lot of
C. too much
D. a little


<b>3. Too and either </b>
+ "Too" is use in (+)


+ "either" is used in (-)


+ Too either are put at the end of the
sentences, behind the conmas.


+Ns and crosses


Mangoes V Bananas X Papaya X


Corn V Spinach X Potatoes X



Fish X Chicken X Beef V


EX: S1: I like mangoes.
S2: I like mangoes, too


- T runs through 5
pictures on P123
Pa: watch TV
Pb:have dinner in a
restaurant / food stall
Pc:go to the movie
theater


Pd:read a book
Pe: play soccer
- T users pictures on
P123 in the mapped
dialogue.


Part A:
- T runs through
indefinite quantifiers
and pictures on P.124
- T reminds the use of
these ...


quantifier
Part B:


- Asks sts to look at 4


pictures on P125 and
read 4 conversations
below; then complete
the dialogues using
a little / a lot of / lots
of or too much


- Sts compare each
other  T checks with
WC.


T numbers sts. Sts
read 3/a in pairs 
exchange


- T reviews use of
"too" and "either".
B/ Ns and crosses.


Ss follow T


- Ss user pictures on
P123 in the mapped
dialogue.


- Ss look at 8 pictures
on P128  T sets the
scene


- Ss write the correct


indefinite quantifiers
for each picture


Ss compare each other
 T checks with WC


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

10’


9’


3’


S1: I don’t like banana.
S2: I don’t like banana, either.
<b>4. So and neither </b>


+ Neither so is used in (-)
+ Dïng so / neither


Eg exchange: - I (don't) like mangoes
- So do I (Neither do I)
<b>5. Imperatives </b>


New words: (to) serve: phục vụ
- vinegar (N) : dấm
- mixture (N) : hỗn hợp
- tea spoonful: muỗng canh
Answer key:


a. peel (gọt vỏ, bóc vỏ) e. add



b. wash f. stir


c. slice g. waite


d. mix (trộn)
<b>*</b>


<b> Homework:</b>
- Do L.F again


- Prepare: Unit 13 A1,4


- T devides the
classinto 2 groups.
- T gives instruction of


completing the


instructions to make
cucumber salad.


T gives correction


Comments
Gives homework


- Ss look at verbs in the
box. T suns through all
the words and their


meanings.


- Ss look at 8 pictures
on P128  T sets the
scene


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 28th

<b>Unit 13: ACTIVITIES</b>



<b> Period : 79 Lesson 1: A1,4(P.129,132)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help students </b>read for details and practice talking about things they like
best


OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for details and
practice talking about things they like best


<b>SKILL : reading,listening, speaking, and writing.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>

PROCEDUCE:
5’


10’



4’


7’
10’


<i><b>I.Warm up</b></i>

<b> :</b>

<i><b> </b></i>


<b>* Chatting</b>


+ Do you like playing sports ?
+ What sport do you play ?
+ When do you play …….?
+ Who do you often play with ?
+ What do you think about ………?


<i><b>II.Pre - reading / listening:</b></i>



-

<b>Pre- teach vocabulary:</b>


- skate b<i><b>oa</b></i>rding : môn trượt ván (trans.)
- r<i><b>o</b></i>ller - skating : mơn trượt Patin( giầy trượt
có bánh xe ở bốn gốc) (visual)


- r<i><b>o</b></i>ller blading : môn trượt patin( giầy trượt
có bánh xe ở dọc đế giầy) (visual)


- a choice: sự chọn lựa (trans.)


- surpr<i><b>i</b></i>sing (a) : ngạc nhiên (explanation)
 surprisingly (adv)



- (to) win the prize : giành giải thưởng( trans)
- a competition : cuộc thi đua( trans)


- (to) win  won : thắng ( situation)
- (to) organize : tổ chức (trans)
- (to) increase : tăng (explanation)
- (to) instead : thay vì (trans)
<i><b>* Set the scene:</b></i>


<b>* </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Pre-questions </b></i>


1. Which sports do you think are the most popular
in the USA ? <b>(baseball)</b>


2. What other sports do you think are also


favored ? <b>(salteboard, roller skating, </b>
<b>roller blading)</b>


+ Which sport is at tenth position ?
<b>(swimming)</b>


<i><b>IIIWhile reading / listening:</b></i>



<i><b>*Check the pre-questions:</b></i>


<i><b>*</b></i>

<i><b>Comprehension questions:</b></i>
<i><b>Answer Key:</b></i>


Remark and lead in
new lesson.


T elicits
T models
T checks


pronunciation, stress,
meaning, kind of
words.


T checks again by
matching


T sets the scene.
T collects one st's
predictions on the bb.


- Asks Sts to listen to
the tape (twice) and -
check their predictions
- T checks with WC


Ss guess


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>

10’


3’



a) He takes part in WFF.


b) His school team won the first prize , they were
so happy and wanted to keep this activity .
c) One activity is a 5 walk to the beach on Sunday


morning , and the other is walk- to – school day
d) It’s 5 km from school to the beach .


e) Wednesday is the WTS day .


f) Members living near school often take part in
the WTS day .


<i><b>IV.Post reading</b></i>

<i> / </i>

<i><b> listening:</b></i>



<i><b>*Discussing:</b></i>


What sport do you like most ?


What sport is the most popular in the class ?


<i>V.</i>

<i><b>Homework :</b></i>



-

Read + translate A1 + A4 (P129 - 123) into
VNese.


- Do E1 (Wb)./ Prepare A3,5


- Asks Sts to read A4 .


P132 and answer qs:
* Lucky numbers!


- Asks Sts to answer
Y / N qs a, b P130 (in
open pair and closed
pair)


-T checks


Comments
Gives homework


Ss work in groups
asking their classmates
what sport they like
most .


-Call on some groups
to practice in front of
the class .


-Ask Ss to write the
number of students
who like each sport
best , then complete the
table in the notebooks .
-Ask Ss to answer the
question : What sport is
the most popular in the


class ?


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 28th

<b>Unit 13: ACTIVITIES</b>



<b> Period : 80 Lesson 2: A3,5(P.131,132)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help ss use adv, adj to talk about sports and write it up.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use adv, adj to talk</b>
about sports and write it up.


<b>SKILL : reading,listening, speaking, and writing.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

5’


10’


4’


<i><b>I/ Warm up:</b></i>



hard





difficulty


<i><b>II/Presentation:</b></i>



<b>* Vocabulary:</b>


- skillful (a) skillfully (adv) : khéo tay
(situation)


- slow (a) slowly(adv) : chậm( explanation)
- <i><b>in</b></i>teresting (a) interestingly(adv): hay, thú
vị( situation)


-s<i><b>u</b></i>dden(a) suddenly (adv): bỗng nhiên ( trans)
- safe (a) safely(adv) : an toàn (explan)


- c<i><b>a</b></i>reless(a) carelessly(adv): bất cẩn (situation)
- strict(a) strictly(adv) : nghiêm


chỉnh( explanation)


- clear (a) clearly (adv) rõ ràng
*Notes:


- careful / carefully -good / well
- bad / badly


<b>*Model sentences:</b>



a. He is a skillful volleyball player
slow swimmer


b. He plays skillfully
swim slowly


*Form: S (he)+ be + a / an + adj + N (job)
S (he) + V + adv


Adjective + ly => adverb
EX : Slow => Slowly
Bad => badly
Quick => quickly


<i><b>III.Practice</b></i>



* Picture drill:


<i>Eg exchange</i>: He is a good soccer player


Remark and lead in
new lesson.


T elicits
T models
T checks


pronunciation, stress,
meaning, kind of


words.


T checks again by
matching


T sets the scene.
T collects one st's
predictions on the bb.


- Asks Sts to listen to
the tape (twice) and -


Ss guess


T and Ss repeat
chorally and
individually.
Ss copy


Ss copy down


Ss copy down


Ss practice in pairs
Ss display in front of
the class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

15’


10’



1’


He plays soccer well
<b>*Word cues drill:</b>


a. He / good - well / soccer player
b. She / quick - quickly / runner
c. Thang / safe - safely / driver
d. Lan / bad - badly / cook
<i><b>IV. Production</b></i>


<i>V.</i>

<i><b>Homework :</b></i>



-

Learn vocabu carefully.


- Copy the exercises, do A5 at home


-Prepare the next lesson


check their predictions
- T asks ss to practice


- T runs through all
word cues


T corrects.


Asks Sts to read A5 .
P132 individually



- T hangs poster on
the bb.  Sts change
the adjectives into
adverbs.


- Asks Sts to make
sentences, using the
words in the poster
Comments


Gives homework


Ss


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 28th

<b>Unit 13: ACTIVITIES</b>



<b> Period : 81 Lesson 3: B1,4(P.134,137)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help students practice about the topic of sports and in modal verbs . </b>
<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice about the topic </b>
of sports and in modal verbs .



SKILL : listening, speaking, and writing, reading.


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
PROCEDUCE:


adj adv


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

5’


5’


8’


16’


<i><b>I. Warm up:</b></i>



* Find someone who:


Find someone who………… Name
Can play soccer well.


Can run quickly .


Can play volleyball skillfully .
Can’t swim quickly .


can’t play table tennis well.


<i><b>II. Presentation:</b></i>




<b>*Vocabulary:</b>


- ought to : phải (synonym = must)
- a table tennis p<i><b>a</b></i>ddle : vợt bóng bàn(picture)
- spare (a) : dư, thừa (trans.)


=> Check Vocab: ROR
<b>* Model sentences:</b>


Would you like to play table tennis?
 I’d like to .


S1 : What should Nam do before he plays table


tennis ?


must


S2: He ought to do his homework


must


* Concept check: - Meaning


- Form: <i><b>S + should + infinitive</b></i>
<i><b> ought</b></i>


<i><b> must</b></i>
- Use: Asking for advices


 Would you like to + V ?


=> Yes , let’s / I’d like to / That’s a good idea
EX : Would you like to come to my house ?


have lunch with me ?
 He ought to do his homework before playing


table tennis .


She ought to help her mother .


<i><b>III. Practice</b></i>

<i>:</i>


*Example :


S1: What should Nam do before he plays


-Greetings .


-Has Ss play a game :
Find someone Who .


T elicits
T models
T checks


pronunciation, stress,
meaning, kind of
words.



T checks again ROR
T sets the scene.
T gives model
sentences


T explains form, use
and meaning of the
modal verb.


-Have Ss work in pairs
.


-Call on some pairs to
practice in front of the
class .


- T asks ss to practice
- T runs through all
word cues


Ss take part in the
game


Ss guess


T and Ss repeat
chorally and
individually.
Ss copy



Ss copy down.


Ss copy down


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

10’
1’


soccer ?


S2: He must do his homework .
*Word cues:


+ Nam / before / soccer / do homework .
+ Lan / when / swimming / swim with adult.
+ We / after meals / brush teeth .


<b>* Questions</b>
Answer key


a. He should finish his homework


b. Nam will be ready after a few some minutes
c. Ba will finish the qs for Math tomorrow
d. Ba has two paddles.


<i><b>V. Production:</b></i>



<b>* Gap Filling: (B4 P 137)</b>
Modal verbs



<i><b>V.Homework</b></i>

<i> :</i>



-Make 3 examples with each structure .
-Do exercise 1,2 at page 83,84 in workbook.
-Prepare part B2


T corrects.


* Asks Ss to read the
dialogue to answer
question


- Call Ss to give
answers


- Remarks and give
correct answers
Asks Sts to read B4 .


P132 individually


- T hangs poster on
the bb.  Sts change
the adjectives into
adverbs.


- Asks Sts to make
sentences, using the
words in the poster
Comments



Gives homework


Ss answer the
questions in pairs


Ss tell their ideas


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 29th

<b>Unit 13: ACTIVITIES</b>



<b> Period : 82 Lesson 4: B2(P.135)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help students practice in making , accepting and refusing an invitation , </b>
using modal verbs .


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice in making , </b>
accepting and refusing an invitation , using modal verbs .


<b>SKILL : listening, speaking, and writing.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

5’


10’



20’


9’


<i><b>I.Warm up: </b></i>



* Mine drill:


- EX: S1: I’m very cold .


S2: You should stay inside , you
shouldn’t go out .


<i><b>II. Presentation:</b></i>



<b>*Mapped Dialogue :</b>


S1: Come and play ………...


S2: I’m ……… . I don’t think I …… .
S1: That’s too bad . Why ….. ?


S2: Well, I should visit my ……….. .
S1: Can you play ………?
S2: Yes, I ……… .


S1: All right . See you ………...
S2: Ok. Bye .



S1: Bye .


<i><b>II. Practice </b></i>



S1: Come and play basketball, Nam
S2: I’m sorry . I don’t think I can .
S1: That’s too bad . Why not ?


S2: Well, I should visit my grandmother.
S1: Can you play on Saturday afternoon?
S2: Yes, I can .


S1: All right . See you at the weekend.
S2: Ok. Bye .


S1: Bye .


<i><b>IV.Production :</b></i>



S1: Come and play ……….
S2: I’m sorry , ………..
S1: Why not?


S2: I must ………
S1: Can you …………..?


- Greetings .
-Have Ss practice
using modal verbs :
one student gives the


situation , one gives
the advice .


-Ask Ss to work in
pairs .


-Call on some pairs to
practice in front of the
class .


-Remark and lead in
new lesson .


T sets the scene.
T elicits


T models
T gives model
sentences


T asks ss to practice in
pairs


Base on the above
dialogue.


T requests ss to make
the other dialogue.
-Has Ss work in pairs .
-Calls on some pairs


to practice in front of
the class .


- T asks ss to practice
- T runs through all
word cues


T corrects.


-Asks Ss to make their
own dialogues , using
the 3 pictures in the
bottom .


-Gives some cues ;


Ss take part in the
game


Ss follow T


Ss guess


T and Ss repeat
chorally and
individually.
Ss follow T


Ss practice in pairs



Ss display in front of
the class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

1’


S2: Yes, …………..
S1: ……….


<i><b>V. Homework :</b></i>



-Write 3 dialogues in the workbook .
-Do exercise 3,4 in workbook .
-Prepare part B3


-Has Ss work in
pairs .Calls on some
pairs to make dialogue
in front of the class .
-Corrects the mistake .


Comments
Gives homework


Ss tell their ideas


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 29th

<b>Unit 13: ACTIVITIES</b>




<b> Period : 83 Lesson 5: B3(P.136-137)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help students read for details and talk about inventions.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for details and talk </b>
about inventions.


<b>SKILL : reading, listening, speaking, and writing.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

5’


8’


4’


8’


10’


<i><b>I.Warm up:</b></i>



* Network:


<i><b>II. Pre-reading:</b></i>



<b>*Vocabulary:</b>



- an inv<i><b>e</b></i>ntion: sù phát minh(situation)
 inv<i><b>e</b></i>ntor (n): nhà phát minh (explanation)
- a s<i><b>u</b></i>rface : bề mặt (translation)


- <i><b>u</b></i>nderwater (a): dưới nước(example)


-a breathing eq<i><b>ui</b></i>pment: thiết bị thở (picture)
- a sc<i><b>u</b></i>ba diving:: mơn lặn có bình dưỡng khí
- a d<i><b>i</b></i>ving vessel : tàu lặn


- (to) expl<i><b>o</b></i>re : khám phá
=.>Check vocabulary: ROR
* Set the scene:


<b> *T / F predictions </b>
statements on P137


<i><b>III.While-reading:</b></i>



<b>* Check T/F prediction:</b>


Answer key: a. F c.T e.T


b.T d.F


<b>* Comprehension questions</b>


<b>Poster </b>



a. How long could a pearl stay understand ?
(2 minutes)


T explains


T corrects


T elicits
T models
T checks


pronunciation, stress,
meaning, kind of
words.


T checks again ROR


T sets the scene
- Ask sts to read
statements on P137
and predict T / F
- T collect sts'
predictions on the b.
- Asks Sts read B3 .
P137 and check their
preditions.


- T checks and gives
correct answers



-T hangs poster 1 on
the bb. Sts find out /
answer the questions.


Ss take part in the
game


Ss follow T


Ss guess


T and Ss repeat
chorally and
individually.


Ss copy
Ss follow T


Ss compare with their
friends.


Ss display in front of
the class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>

9’


1’


b. How long can a diver stay underwater ? (a long
time)



c. When did Jacques Cousteau die ? (1997)
d. What could he study ? (underwater life)
e. How can we explore the oceans now ? (with
special TV cameras)


<i><b>IV. Post-reading:</b></i>



<b> *Retelling</b>


<i><b>V.Homework </b></i>

<i><b> </b></i>

<i>:</i>



-

Read + translate B3 . P136


- Learn new words in by heart


- Prepare: Unit 14 :A1


T gives correction
T asks ss to retell the
story.


T corrects


Comments
Gives homework


Ss practice in groups to
answer the questions.
Ss display in front of


the class


Ss tell their ideas


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 29th

<b>Unit 14: FRETIME FUN</b>



<b> Period : 84 Lesson 1: A1(P.139-140)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help students. listen for specific information; Talk about habit in ss' free time</b>
and give orally report back.


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen for specific</b>
information; Talk about habit in ss' free time and give orally report back.


<b>SKILL : reading, listening, speaking, and writing.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

PROCEDUCE:
5’


8’


4’



8’


10’


<i><b>I.Warm up :</b></i>



<i><b>*</b></i><b>Brainstorming</b> watch TV


<i><b>II.Pre - listening / reading : </b></i>



<b>*Pre - teach vocab.</b>


- an adv<i><b>e</b></i>nture: cuộc phiêu lưu( situation)
- a cr<i><b>i</b></i>cket: con dế mèn(explanation)
- s<i><b>e</b></i>ries (Ns) : phim nhiều tập(example)
- (to) guess = (to) pred<i><b>i</b></i>ct.(situation)


- to prefer to do/ doing something to something else:
thích cái gì hơn( translation)


<b>* Open prediction:</b>
<b>+ Set the scene:</b>


- What do Lan and Hoa usually do in the evening ?


<i><b>III. While listening / reading :</b></i>



* Check open prediction:


Answer key: Lan usually watches TV



Hoa usually talks, reads and plays chess
<b>* Multiple choice </b>


Answer key: a - C c - B e - D


b - A d - C


T explains


T corrects


T elicits
T models
T checks


pronunciation, stress,
meaning, kind of
words.


T checks again ROR


T sets the scene
- Ask sts to read
statements on P137
and predict open
prediction.


- Asks Sts listen to
the tape and correct


their predictions
- T checks and gives
answers


- Asks Sts practice
reading in pairs 
exchange the roles
and then do the
multiple choice .A1 .
P140


Ss take part in the
game


Ss follow T


Ss guess


T and Ss repeat
chorally and
individually.


Ss copy
Ss follow T


Ss predict and give
the answers.


Ss listen to the tape.
Ss compare with


their friends.


Ss display in front of
the class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

9’


1’


<i><b>IV.Post listening / reading :</b></i>



<b>*Futher Practice: Discussion</b>


What do you usually do in your freetime ?
Do you like watching TV?


Do you like watching news in English?
What programs on TV do you like watching?
What is your favorite program?


How much time do you spend watching TV a day ?


<b>V.Homework: </b>



- Read + translate A1 . P139 - 140
- Learn structures in lesson


- Prepare: A2


- T checks with WC



-Has Ss work in
pairs asking and
answering about
themselves .


-Calls on some pairs
to practice in front of
the class .


-Remarks .
T corrects


Comments
Gives homework


Ss practice in groups
to answer the


questions.


Ss display in front of
the class


Ss tell their ideas


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 30th

<b>Unit 14: FREETIME FUN</b>




<b> Period : 85 Lesson 2: A2(P.141)</b>


Date of preparation : 14/03/2010
Date of teaching : 23/03/2010


<b>AIM:To help students talk about their favorite TV programme and write it up.</b>


<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their favorite</b>
TV programme and write it up.


<b>SKILL : listening, reading, speaking, writing.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

5’


8’


4’


5’


7’


<i><b>I.Warm up :</b></i>



<b>* Slap the board:</b>


<i><b>II. Presentation:</b></i>




<b>*Pre - teach vocab. </b>


- dr<i><b>a</b></i>ma (a) : kịch( situation)


- det<i><b>e</b></i>ctive (n + a): thám tử explana)


- a c<i><b>o</b></i>wboy movie: phim cao bồi( situation)
- (to) sound : nghe có vẻ (translation)
=> Check vocabulary: ROR


<b>*Presentation dialogue:</b>
<b>+ Set the scene:</b>


<b> What do Hoa and Lan want to do? </b>
<b> - They want to go to the movies.</b>
+ Model sentences


- Hoa: What would you like to see?


<b>- Lan: I would like to watch a cowboy movie..</b>
* Concept check:- meaning


- Form: <i><b>What would you like to + V (inf) ?</b></i>
<i><b> I'd like to + V (inf) ...</b></i>


- Use : hỏi và trả lời bạn muốn xem cái gì


<i><b>III.Practice</b></i>

<i>:</i>


+ Word cues drill



a. see / a cowboy movie
b.see / plays


c.watch / news
d. watch / cartoons
<b>Example exchange:</b>


S1: What would you like to see?


S2: I’d like to see a cowboy film


T explains


T corrects


T elicits
T models
T checks


pronunciation, stress,
meaning, kind of
words.


T checks again ROR
T sets the scene


- Asks Ss to read the
dialogue


- Call Ss to read


dialogue


-Asks Ss to look at
advertisement to build
up similar dialogue.


Ss take part in the
game


Ss follow T


Ss guess


T and Ss repeat
chorally and
individually.
Ss copy
Ss follow T


Ss listen to the tape
and answer the
question.


Ss practice the
dialogue.


Ss display in front
of the class


cinema



concert
theater


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

8’


7’
1’


<i><b>+</b></i><b>Practice the dialogue</b>
<b>*Mapped dialogue:</b>


You……… …… Your friend
Would ……theater?


….good . What would
you ………..?


….an Easy life …….
Youth theater .


Ok …….Tuesday night?
Sorry ….E club .


How….Thursday?


Ok .
Fine, let’s ………


<i><b>IV.Production:</b></i>




<i><b>*</b></i>


<i><b> Make the similar dialogue</b></i>
<b>* Write it up the mapped dialogue</b>

<b>V.Homework: </b>



-

Read + translate A2 . P141


-Make up a similar conversation; using the
information in the advertisements on P141.


- Prepare: A3


Calls on some pairs to
practice in front of the
class .


-Remarks .


.


-Gives a mapped
dialogue :


T corrects


Comments
Gives homework



Ss practice in pairs
Ss display in front
of the class


Ss repeat after T
Ss make them.


Ss display


Listen and prepare
at


home


Week : 30th

<b>Unit 14: FREETIME FUN</b>



<b> Period : 86 Lesson 3: A3(P.142)</b>


Date of preparation : 15/03/2010
Date of teaching : 23/03/2010


<b>AIM:To help students read the text about TV in Vietnam.</b>


OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read the text about TV in
Vietnam.


<b>SKILL : reading, speaking, and writing.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

5’



8’


4’


7’
12


<i><b>I.Warm up:</b></i>



* Shark attrack:
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Television


<i><b>II.Pre – reading: </b></i>



<b>*Pre - teach vocab.</b>


- an <i><b>o</b></i>wner : người chủ (translation)
- a pr<i><b>o</b></i>gram: chương trình(example)
- (to) g<i><b>a</b></i>ther: tập trung, tụ tập( situation)
- (to) change : thay đổi(explanation)
- a n<i><b>ei</b></i>ghbor: người hàng xóm(situation)
- c<i><b>o</b></i>mfortable (a) : thoải mái (explanation)
=> Check vocabulary: Matching


* Set the scene: ( Three pictures)
<b>* T / F predictions</b>


F 1. Thirty years ago in Vietnam, a lot of


people had TV sets.


T 2. These TV owners were very popular.
F 3. The neighbors gathered to watch colour
programs in the evening


T 4. Now they don't spend much time together
F 5. A few people have TV sets today.


<i><b>III. While-reading:</b></i>



<b>* Check T?F prediction:</b>
1. F ; 2.T ; 3.F ;4.T ; 5.F


<b> * Comprehension questions </b>


1. Did a lot of people have TV sets 30 years ago ?
- No, very few people.


2. What did they watch ?
- The black and while programs


3. What might the older people do ?
<b> - They might sleep a little</b>


4. Did anyone go home before the TV program
finished ?


- No, no one



T asks these questions


T corrects


T elicits
T models
T checks


pronunciation, stress,
meaning, kind of
words.


T checks again
matching


T sets the scene
T runs through the
statements.


T asks ss to read the
statements and predict


T asks ss to read the
text and check T/F
T corrects


- Asks Ss to read the
text again and answer
the questions in
groups.



Calls on some groups


Ss answer them
individually.
Ss follow T


Ss guess


T and Ss repeat
chorally and
individually.
Ss copy
Ss follow T


Ss predict T/F?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179>

8’


1’


5. Where do people watch TV now ?
- In their living room


<b>* Gaps filling :</b>
Answer Key:


1. people 5. evening 9. have


2. not 6. gather 10. life



3. TV 7. they 11.know
4. Popular 8. today


<i><b>IV. Post-reading:</b></i>



<b>* Retell the content of the text.</b>
<b>* Discussion:</b>


+ Questions:


1/ Do you like watching TV?


2/ What would you like to watch on TV?
3/ Do you have a TV set?


<i><b>V.Homework :</b></i>



- Read + translate A3 . P142


- Do excercises in the work book.
- learn new words in by heart
- Prepare: B1,2


to practice in front of
the class .


-Remarks .


.



T asks ss to complete
the summary in pairs


T gives correction


Comments
Gives homework


Ss display in front
of the class


Some pairs go to
the b to fill.


Listen and prepare
at


home
Week : 30th

<b>Unit 14: FREETIME FUN</b>



<b> Period : 87 Lesson 4: B1-2 ( p.144-145)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help students </b>talk about TV programs. Listen and write the time of the
programs.



OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about TV programs.
Listen and write the time of the programs.


<b>SKILL : listening, reading, speaking, and writing.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>

PROCEDUCE:
5’


8’


4’


8’
10’


<i><b>I.Warm up:</b></i>



<b>* Brainstorming</b>


news


<i><b>II.Presentation:</b></i>



*Pre –teach vocabulary:
- a kind : loại( translation)


- (to) pref<i><b>e</b></i>r : thích, thích hơn( situation)
I prefer cats to dogs.


- a sport show :chương trình thể thao( example)


- w<i><b>e</b></i>ather f<i><b>o</b></i>recast: dự báo thời tiết ( explanation)
=> Check vocabulary : ROR


*Presentation dialogue : B1 . P144
Ba ... Nga...


<b>* Model Sentences</b>


Ba: What kinds of programs do you like ?
Nga: I like programs about teenagers
* Concept check: - Meaning


- Form: <i><b>What kinds of programs do you like ?</b></i>
<i><b> I like programs about ...</b></i>


- Intonation: MS.
- Use: Talking about TV favorite program


<i><b>III. Practice :</b></i>



<b>* Practice the dialogue:</b>
*Word cue drill


a. cartoon c. the world
b. children d. early news
EX: a/


S1:What kinds of programs do you like ?
S2: I like programs about cartoon.



<i><b>IV. Listening:</b></i>



T asks these questions


T corrects
T elicits
T models
T checks


pronunciation, stress,
meaning, kind of
words.


T checks again by
ROR


T sets the scene


T gives model


sentences, use, form,
meaning


.


.


T gives word cues to
ss and gives a model.



Ss answer them
individually.
Ss follow T


Ss guess


T and Ss repeat
chorally and
individually.
Ss copy
Ss follow T


Ss copy.


Ss give their ideas
Ss practice the word
cues


Ss display in front of
the class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=181>

9’


1’


*Predict the questions


a. What does Ba like to watch on TV ?
b. What does Nga " " " ?
Answer Key



a. Sport show; cartoon and movie


b. Programs about teenagers in other countries.
<b>Tape transcript</b>


<i>Ba: What's on TV at six tonight, Lan ?</i>


<i>Lan: Let me see. It's the early news. You want to</i>
<i>watch it, don't you ?</i>


<i>Ba:</i> <i>Come on, Lan / I want to watch the movie "A</i>
<i>fistful of dollars".What does it start </i>


<i>Lan: It starts at 7 o'clock, after the programe "the</i>
<i>world today" at 6.15</i>


<i>Ba: And what about the weather forecast ?</i>
<i>What time is it on ?</i>


<i>Lan: It's on at 10 past 6. But we should watch our</i>
<i>children's program. It starts at five</i>


<i>Ba:</i> <i>Ok. That sounds great</i>
<b>*Answer key:</b>


a/ 5.00 b/6.00 c/6.10 d/6.15 e/7.00


<i><b>V.Homework :</b></i>




- Read + translate B1 . P144 into VNese.
- Prepare: B3,4


T turns on the tape
twice.


T corrects
Comments
Gives homework


correct their
predictions.


Some pairs go to the b
to say the time they’ve
heard


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 31st

<b>Unit 14: FREETIME FUN</b>



<b> Period : 88 Lesson 5: B3-4 ( p.145-146)</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help students read for details about popular TV programs.</b>



OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for details about
popular TV programs.


<b>SKILL : listening, reading, speaking, and writing.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=182>

5’


8’


4’


8’
10’


<i><b>I.Warm up </b></i>

:
*Brainstorming:


cartoon


<i><b>II.Pre – reading:</b></i>



<b>*Pre - teach vocab</b>


- an <i><b>au</b></i>dience : khán giả( situation)


- an <i><b>im</b></i>port : hàng nhập khẩu( explanation)
- a band : ban, nhóm nhạc( example)
- a c<i><b>o</b></i>ntest : kỳ thi( translation)


 a cont<i><b>e</b></i>stant : thí sinh( situation)


- a s<i><b>a</b></i>tellite : vệ tinh ( explanation)
=> Check vocabulary : Matching
<b>+ Set the scene:</b>


Pictures (p.145)
<b> T / F predictions </b>


T 1. Pop music, contests imports are popular
TV programs


F 2. Teenagers like to listen to classical music
T 3. There are contests of knowledge


T 4. The contestants are students, workers, TV
viewers ...


F 5. Imports are very expensive


- T collects ss' predictions on the bb.


<i><b>III. While reading: </b></i>



<b>* Check T?F prediction:</b>
1.T ; 2. F ; 3.T ; 4.T ; 5.F.
<b>*Comprehension questions</b>
Answer Key:


a<i>- They like to hear the lastest pop music and see</i>
<i>the shows of their favorite artists.</i>



<i>b. In contest programs, the contestants are</i>
<i>students, workers or family members</i>


<i>c. They usually include police and hospital series.</i>


T asks ss to compete
the game into two
groups(group work)


T corrects
T elicits
T models
T checks


pronunciation, stress,
meaning, kind of
words.


T checks again by
Matching


T sets the scene
T turns on the tape
twice.


. T hangs poster on
the bb. Sts read &
predict.


- Asks Sts to read the


text and check their
predictions.


- Asks Sts to answer
comp qs.


-T checks with WC


T corrects


Ss compete
Ss follow T


Ss guess


T and Ss repeat
chorally and
individually.
Ss copy
Ss follow T


Ss listen to the tape


Ss give their ideas


Ss display in front of
the class


- Ss read the text again
and correct their


predictions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=183>

9’


1’


<i>d. Free answers.</i>


<i><b> IV .Post-reading:</b></i>



* Filling :B4. P146
Answer Key.


1. around 4. series 7. station
2. watch 5. show 8. receive


3. listen 6. like 9. cities


10. possible


<i><b>V.Homework:</b></i>



- Read + translate B3 P145
- Finish B4 . P146


- Write the answers for comprehension questions of
B3 P145.


- T gives instructions
of doing B4. P146


- Asks Sts to work
individually


compare each other
- T checks with WC.
T corrects


Comments
ives homework


Ss work individuaaly
to fill in the blanks
with the correct words.
Ss display on the b.


Listen and prepare at
home


Week : 31st

<b> TEST ONE PERIOD</b>



<b> Period : 89 Time: 45’</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help students review all the knowlegdes they’ve studied from unit12 - 14.</b>
<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review all the</b>
knowlegdes they’ve studied from unit12 - 14.



<b>SKILL : listening, reading, speaking, and writing.</b>
<b>TEACHING AIDS : photocopied paper test</b>


<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


<b>I</b>

<b>/ QUESTION 1: LISTENING(2,5ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=184>

Nga : Would you like to go to the movies this week?


Mai : That sounds good . What would you like to ( 1 )………?


Nga : There is a (2)………on at the Fandsland Theater.
Mai : Ok. Can you make it on ( 3) ……… night?


Nga : Sorry. I must go to the ( 4)………
Mai : What about Sunday ?


Nga : All right. See you on Sunday. What time will we meet ?
Mai : We will meet at ( 5) ……….Bye
Nga : Ok. Bye.


<b>II/ QUESTION 2 : READING (2.5ms)</b>
 <i><b>Read the passage and do the exercises :</b></i>


Hans Christan Andersen was a Danish author . He grew up in a poor
family , and he wanted to be an actor .Later , a friend of his paid for
his education at Conpenhagen University. He wrote novels , plays ,
poetry and travel books . However ,he became the most famous for
the fairy tales he wrote between 1835 and 1872 .



<i><b>1. Answer(T) for True or (F) for False: </b></i>


a.Hans Christan Andersen was a Danish author. …………..
b.He grew up in a poor family. ………


c.He wrote novels , plays , poetry and travel books. ………..


d.He was the most famous for fairy tales he wrote between 1827 and 1853.
………


<i><b>3.</b></i> <i><b>Answer the questions : (1,5ms)</b></i>
<b> a.Who was a Danish author ?</b>


………
b. Did he grow up in a rich family ?


………
d..What did he write ?


………
<b>III/ QUESTION 3 : WRITING (2,5ms)</b>


 <i><b>Put the words into the correct order to make complete sentences :</b></i>
1. a cowboy movie / like /she / would / watch / to.


………
2. played/ my children / the garden / yesterday / in .


………
3. Sang and Lan / the market / to / went / buy / to / some sweets and cakes .


………
4. first / do / you / homework / must / your .


………
5. skillfully / he / volleyball / plays .


………
<b> IV/ QUESTION 4 : GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY: (2,5ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=185>

<b> 1.She is a ……….. swimmer..</b>


a.slow b. slowly c.slower d. the slow


2. What would you like ………. ?


a. to eat b.eat c.eating d.ate


3. They must ……….. go to the wedding.


a. to go b. going c. go d. went


4. Can you make it ……… Sunday night ?
a. at b. in c. to d. on


5.Most of world’s surface is ……….


a. land b. rock c. water d. sand


6.Thirty years ago , people watched TV with ……… programs.
a. black b. white c. colorful d. black and white


7.Nam drives his car ……….


a.care b. carefully c. careful d. careless
8. Nam ………..me last Tuesday.


a.visit b. to visit c.visited d. visits
9. Would you like……….to the movies this week ?


a. to go b. go c. going d. went
10. They ……….. to Vung Tau yesterday.


a. went b. go c. goes d.to go




<b>The end</b>


Week : 31st

<b> CORRECTION THE TEST</b>



<b> Period : 90 Time: 45’</b>


Date of preparation :
Date of teaching :


<b>AIM:To help students review all the knowlegdes they’ve studied from unit12 - 14.</b>
<b>OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review all the</b>
knowlegdes they’ve studied from unit12 - 14.


<b>SKILL : listening, reading, speaking, and writing.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : photocopied paper test</b>


<b>PROCEDUCE: </b>


<b>I</b>

<b>/ QUESTION 1: LISTENING(2,5ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=186>

Mai : That sounds good . What would you like to ( 1 )…<i><b>see</b></i>………?


Nga : There is a (2)……<i><b>a cowboy movie</b></i>………on at the Fandsland Theater.
Mai : Ok. Can you make it on ( 3) …<i><b>Saturday</b></i>……… night?
Nga : Sorry. I must go to the ( 4)…….. <i><b>wedding</b></i> …


Mai : What about Sunday ?


Nga : All right. See you on Sunday. What time will we meet ?
Mai : We will meet at ( 5) ……<i><b>7.30</b></i>……….Bye


Nga : Ok. Bye.


<b>II/ QUESTION 2 : READING (2.5ms)</b>
 <i><b>Read the passage and do the exercises :</b></i>


Hans Christan Andersen was a Danish author . He grew up in a poor
family , and he wanted to be an actor .Later , a friend of his paid for
his education at Conpenhagen University. He wrote novels , plays ,
poetry and travel books . However ,he became the most famous for
the fairy tales he wrote between 1835 and 1872 .


<i><b>2. Answer(T) for True or (F) for False: </b></i>



a.Hans Christan Andersen was a Danish author. …T………..
b.He grew up in a poor family. ………T………


c.He wrote novels , plays , poetry and travel books. ……T………..


d.He was the most famous for fairy tales he wrote between 1827 and 1853.
…………F………


<i><b>4.</b></i> <i><b>Answer the questions : (1,5ms)</b></i>
<b> a.Who was a Danish author ?</b>


……Hans Christan Andersen was a Danish author.………
b. Did he grow up in a rich family ?


……No, he didn’t………
d..What did he write ?


……He wrote novels, plays, poetry and travel books.………
<b>III/ QUESTION 3 : WRITING (2,5ms)</b>


 <i><b>Put the words into the correct order to make complete sentences :</b></i>
1. a cowboy movie / like /she / would / watch / to.


…<i><b>She would like to watch a cowboy movie………</b></i>
2. played/ my children / the garden / yesterday / in .
…<i><b>My children played in the garden yesterday.……</b></i>


3. Sang and Lan / the market / to / went / buy / to / some sweets and cakes .
…<i><b>Sang and Lan went to the market to buy some sweet and cakes.……</b></i>
4. first / do / you / homework / must / your .



…<i><b>You must do your homework first………..</b></i>
5. skillfully / he / volleyball / plays .


…<i><b>He plays volleyball skillfully………</b></i>


<b> IV/ QUESTION 4 : GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY: (2,5ms)</b>
 <i><b>Choose the best option to complete the sentences</b><b> :</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=187>

<i><b>a.slow</b></i> b. slowly c.slower d. the slow
2. What would you like ………. ?


<i><b>a. to eat</b></i> b.eat c.eating d.ate


3. They must ……….. go to the wedding.


a. to go b. going <i><b>c. go</b></i> d. went


4. Can you make it ……… Sunday night ?
a. at b. in c. to <i><b>d. on</b></i>


5.Most of world’s surface is ……….


a. land b. rock <i><b>c. water</b></i> d. sand


6.Thirty years ago , people watched TV with ……… programs.
a. black <i><b>b. white</b></i> c. colorful d. black and white
7.Nam drives his car ……….


a.care <i><b>b. carefully</b></i> c. careful d. careless


8. Nam ………..me last Tuesday.


a.visit b. to visit <i><b>c.visited</b></i> d. visits
9. Would you like……….to the movies this week ?


<i><b>a. to go</b></i> b. go c. going d. went
10. They ……….. to Vung Tau yesterday.


<i><b>a. went </b></i> b. go c. goes d.to go


<b>The end</b>


Week : 32nd

<b>Unit 15: GOING OUT</b>



<b> Period : 91 Lesson 1: A1( p.)</b>


Date of preparation :29/03/2010
Date of teaching : 05/04/2010


<b>AIM: To practice in giving advice listen and read for details.</b>


OBJECTIVE : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to to practice in giving
advice listen and read for details.


<b>SKILL : listening, reading, speaking, and writing.</b>


<b>TEACHING AIDS : textbook, chalk and posters and pictures</b>
PROCEDUCE:



5’

<i><b><sub>I.Warm up </sub></b></i>

<sub>: </sub> T asks ss to compete
the game into two
groups(group work)


Ss compete
Ss follow T


video games How long


How often homework


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=188>

8’


4’


8’
10’


9’


<i><b>II.Pre – reading:</b></i>



<b>*Pre - teach vocab</b>


- an <i><b>au</b></i>dience : khán giả( situation)


- an <i><b>im</b></i>port : hàng nhập khẩu( explanation)
- a band : ban, nhóm nhạc( example)
- a c<i><b>o</b></i>ntest : kỳ thi( translation)



 a cont<i><b>e</b></i>stant : thí sinh( situation)
- a s<i><b>a</b></i>tellite : vệ tinh ( explanation)
=> Check vocabulary : Matching
<b>+ Set the scene:</b>


Pictures (p.145)
<b> T / F predictions </b>


T 1. Pop music, contests imports are popular
TV programs


F 2. Teenagers like to listen to classical music
T 3. There are contests of knowledge


T 4. The contestants are students, workers, TV
viewers ...


F 5. Imports are very expensive


- T collects ss' predictions on the bb.


<i><b>III. While reading: </b></i>



<b>* Check T?F prediction:</b>
1.T ; 2. F ; 3.T ; 4.T ; 5.F.
<b>*Comprehension questions</b>
Answer Key:


a<i>- They like to hear the lastest pop music and see</i>


<i>the shows of their favorite artists.</i>


<i>b. In contest programs, the contestants are</i>
<i>students, workers or family members</i>


<i>c. They usually include police and hospital series.</i>
<i>d. Free answers.</i>


T corrects
T elicits
T models
T checks


pronunciation, stress,
meaning, kind of
words.


T checks again by
Matching


T sets the scene
T turns on the tape
twice.


. T hangs poster on
the bb. Sts read &
predict.


- Asks Sts to read the
text and check their


predictions.


- Asks Sts to answer
comp qs.


-T checks with WC


T corrects


Ss guess


T and Ss repeat
chorally and
individually.
Ss copy
Ss follow T


Ss listen to the tape


Ss give their ideas


Ss display in front of
the class


- Ss read the text again
and correct their
predictions.


Ss work in groups to
answer the questions.


Some groups go to the
b to say the answers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=189>

1’


<i><b> IV .Post-reading:</b></i>



* Filling :B4. P146
Answer Key.


1. around 4. series 7. station
2. watch 5. show 8. receive


3. listen 6. like 9. cities


10. possible


<i><b>V.Homework:</b></i>



- Read + translate B3 P145
- Finish B4 . P146


- Write the answers for comprehension questions of
B3 P145.


- T gives instructions
of doing B4. P146
- Asks Sts to work
individually



compare each other
- T checks with WC.
T corrects


Comments
ives homework


to fill in the blanks
with the correct words.
Ss display on the b.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=190>

tập trung,tụ tập


thoải mái



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=191>

chương trình



</div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×